Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

States of mind

  • 1 Mind-body Problem

       From this I knew that I was a substance the whole essence or nature of which is to think, and that for its existence there is no need of any place, nor does it depend on any material thing; so that this "me," that is to say, the soul by which I am what I am, is entirely distinct from body, and is even more easy to know than is the latter; and even if body were not, the soul would not cease to be what it is. (Descartes, 1970a, p. 101)
        still remains to be explained how that union and apparent intermingling [of mind and body]... can be found in you, if you are incorporeal, unextended and indivisible.... How, at least, can you be united with the brain, or some minute part in it, which (as has been said) must yet have some magnitude or extension, however small it be? If you are wholly without parts how can you mix or appear to mix with its minute subdivisions? For there is no mixture unless each of the things to be mixed has parts that can mix with one another. (Gassendi, 1970, p. 201)
       here are... certain things which we experience in ourselves and which should be attributed neither to the mind nor body alone, but to the close and intimate union that exists between the body and the mind.... Such are the appetites of hunger, thirst, etc., and also the emotions or passions of the mind which do not subsist in mind or thought alone... and finally all the sensations. (Descartes, 1970b, p. 238)
       With any other sort of mind, absolute Intelligence, Mind unattached to a particular body, or Mind not subject to the course of time, the psychologist as such has nothing to do. (James, 1890, p. 183)
       [The] intention is to furnish a psychology that shall be a natural science: that is to represent psychical processes as quantitatively determinate states of specifiable material particles, thus making these processes perspicuous and free from contradiction. (Freud, 1966, p. 295)
       The thesis is that the mental is nomologically irreducible: there may be true general statements relating the mental and the physical, statements that have the logical form of a law; but they are not lawlike (in a strong sense to be described). If by absurdly remote chance we were to stumble on a non-stochastic true psychophysical generalization, we would have no reason to believe it more than roughly true. (Davidson, 1970, p. 90)
       We can divide those who uphold the doctrine that men are machines, or a similar doctrine, into two categories: those who deny the existence of mental events, or personal experiences, or of consciousness;... and those who admit the existence of mental events, but assert that they are "epiphenomena"-that everything can be explained without them, since the material world is causally closed. (Popper & Eccles, 1977, p. 5)
       Mind affects brain and brain affects mind. That is the message, and by accepting it you commit yourself to a special view of the world. It is a view that shows the limits of the genetic imperative on what we turn out to be, both intellectually and emotionally. It decrees that, while the secrets of our genes express themselves with force throughout our lives, the effect of that information on our bodies can be influenced by our psychological history and beliefs about the world. And, just as important, the other side of the same coin argues that what we construct in our minds as objective reality may simply be our interpretations of certain bodily states dictated by our genes and expressed through our physical brains and body. Put differently, various attributes of mind that seem to have a purely psychological origin are frequently a product of the brain's interpreter rationalizing genetically driven body states. Make no mistake about it: this two-sided view of mind-brain interactions, if adopted, has implications for the management of one's personal life. (Gazzaniga, 1988, p. 229)

    Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Mind-body Problem

  • 2 state of mind

    душевное состояние; умонастроение

    And my state of mind, what with the hurry, the worry and a growing exultation, was peculiar enough. (J. Conrad, ‘Chance’, part I, ch. I) — А мое душевное состояние, благодаря спешке, хлопотам и все возраставшему восторгу, было в самом деле необычным.

    How precisely their words described their opposite states of mind. (A. Saxton, ‘The Great Midland’, ‘The Second War’, ch. 26) — Как точно отражалось в их словах различие взглядов.

    Felix was in a strange state of mind (I. Murdoch, ‘An Unofficial Rose’, ch. 27) — Феликс пребывал в каком-то странном состоянии.

    Large English-Russian phrasebook > state of mind

  • 3 one's state of mind

       чьё-л. душeвнoe cocтoяниe; умoнacтpoeниe
        And my state of mind, what with the hurry, the worry and a growing exultation, was peculiar enough (J. Conrad). How precisely their words described their opposite states of mind (A. Saxton)

    Concise English-Russian phrasebook > one's state of mind

  • 4 speak one’s mind

    صَرَّحَ \ declare: to say clearly and publicly; make known: Our enemies declared war on us. The result of the election will be declared soon. own: (with up) to declare that one is guilty: Whoever broke that window should own up at once. speak one’s mind: to say plainly what one thinks, even if it will annoy other people. state: to express; say: Please state your reasons. He states that he has no money. \ See Also أعلن (أَعْلَن)‏

    Arabic-English glossary > speak one’s mind

  • 5 New Thought (A mind-healing movement that originated in the United States in the 19th century, based on religious and metaphysical presuppositions)

    Религия: "Новая мысль"

    Универсальный англо-русский словарь > New Thought (A mind-healing movement that originated in the United States in the 19th century, based on religious and metaphysical presuppositions)

  • 6 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

    Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:
    IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis
    JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association
    SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)
    PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly
    WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)
    PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    \
    О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts
    \
    1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.
    2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.
    3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.
    5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.
    6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.
    7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.
    8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.
    9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.
    10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.
    11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.
    12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.
    15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.
    16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.
    17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.
    18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.
    19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.
    20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.
    21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.
    22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.
    23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.
    24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.
    25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.
    27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.
    28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.
    29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.
    31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.
    32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.
    33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.
    34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.
    36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.
    37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.
    38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.
    39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.
    40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.
    41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).
    42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.
    43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.
    44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.
    45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.
    47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.
    48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.
    49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.
    50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.
    51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.
    52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.
    53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.
    54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.
    55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.
    56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.
    57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.
    58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.
    59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.
    60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.
    61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.
    62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.
    63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.
    64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.
    65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.
    66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.
    67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.
    68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.
    69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.
    70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.
    71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.
    72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.
    73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.
    74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.
    75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.
    76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.
    77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).
    78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.
    79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.
    80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.
    81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.
    82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.
    83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.
    85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.
    86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.
    88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.
    89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.
    90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.
    91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.
    92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.
    93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.
    94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.
    96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.
    98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.
    99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.
    100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.
    101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.
    102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.
    103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.
    104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.
    105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.
    106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.
    107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.
    110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.
    111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.
    112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.
    114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.
    116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.
    117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.
    119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.
    120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.
    121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.
    122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.
    123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.
    125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.
    126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.
    127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.
    128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.
    130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.
    133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.
    134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.
    136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.
    137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.
    140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.
    141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.
    142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.
    143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.
    144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.
    145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.
    147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.
    148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.
    149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.
    151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.
    152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.
    153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.
    154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.
    155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.
    156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.
    157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.
    158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.
    159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.
    161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.
    164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.
    165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.
    166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.
    167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.
    168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.
    170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.
    171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.
    173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.
    174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.
    175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.
    176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.
    177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.
    178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.
    179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.
    180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.
    181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.
    183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.
    184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.
    185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.
    186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.
    187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.
    188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.
    189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.
    190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.
    193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.
    195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.
    196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.
    198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.
    199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.
    200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.
    201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.
    202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.
    203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.
    204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.
    205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.
    207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.
    210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.
    211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.
    212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.
    214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.
    215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.
    216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.
    218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
    219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.
    220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.
    221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.
    222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.
    223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.
    224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.
    225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.
    227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.
    228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.
    229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.
    230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).
    231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.
    232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.
    233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.
    235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.
    236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.
    237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.
    240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.
    241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.
    242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.
    243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.
    244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).
    245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.
    246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.
    247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.
    248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.
    249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.
    250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.
    251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.
    252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.
    253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.
    254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.
    255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.
    256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.
    257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.
    258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.
    259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.
    260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.
    261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.
    262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.
    263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.
    264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.
    265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.
    266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.
    267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.
    268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.
    271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.
    272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.
    273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.
    274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.
    275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.
    276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.
    277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.
    278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.
    279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.
    280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.
    281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.
    282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.
    283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.
    284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.
    285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.
    286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.
    287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.
    288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.
    289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.
    290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.
    292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.
    293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.
    295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.
    296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.
    297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.
    298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.
    299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.
    300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.
    301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.
    302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.
    303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.
    304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.
    305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.
    306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.
    308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.
    309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.
    311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.
    312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.
    313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.
    314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.
    315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.
    316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.
    317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.
    318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.
    319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.
    320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.
    321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.
    322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.
    323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.
    324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.
    326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.
    327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.
    330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.
    331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.
    332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.
    335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.
    336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.
    337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.
    338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.
    339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).
    341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.
    342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).
    345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.
    346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.
    347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.
    348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.
    349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.
    350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.
    354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.
    355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.
    356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.
    357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.
    358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.
    359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.
    360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.
    366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.
    367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.
    369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.
    371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.
    372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.
    373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.
    374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.
    375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.
    376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.
    377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.
    379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.
    380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.
    381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.
    383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.
    384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.
    385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.
    386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.
    387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.
    390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.
    391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.
    392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).
    396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.
    397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.
    399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.
    401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.
    402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.
    403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.
    404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.
    405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.
    406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.
    407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.
    409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).
    410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.
    411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.
    412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.
    414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.
    415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.
    416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.
    417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.
    418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.
    422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.
    423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.
    424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.
    425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.
    426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).
    427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.
    428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.
    429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.
    432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.
    433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.
    434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.
    435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.
    436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.
    437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.
    438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.
    439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.
    440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.
    441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).
    442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.
    443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.
    444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.
    445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.
    447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.
    449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.
    450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.
    451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.
    458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.
    459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.
    460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.
    461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.
    462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.
    465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.
    466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.
    467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.
    468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.
    471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.
    474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.
    475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.
    476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.
    477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.
    478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.
    479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.
    480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.
    481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.
    482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.
    483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.
    484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.
    485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.
    486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.
    487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).
    488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.
    489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.
    490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.
    491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.
    492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.
    493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.
    494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.
    495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.
    498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.
    499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.
    502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.
    503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.
    504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.
    505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.
    506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.
    507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.
    508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.
    510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.
    511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.
    512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.
    516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.
    517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.
    518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.
    521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.
    522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.
    524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.
    525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.
    526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.
    527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.
    529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.
    530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.
    531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.
    532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.
    533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.
    534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.
    535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.
    536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.
    538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.
    539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.
    540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
    541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.
    544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.
    545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.
    548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.
    549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.
    550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.
    551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.
    552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.
    553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.
    554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.
    555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.
    556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.
    558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.
    560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.
    561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.
    562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.
    564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.
    565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.
    566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.
    567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.
    568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.
    569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.
    570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.
    571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.
    572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.
    573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
    576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.
    577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.
    578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.
    579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.
    580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.
    581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.
    582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.
    585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.
    586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.
    589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.
    590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.
    591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.
    592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.
    593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.
    595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.
    596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.
    597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.
    598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.
    599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.
    600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.
    601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.
    602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.
    604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.
    606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
    607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).
    608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.
    609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.
    610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.
    612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.
    613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.
    614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.
    615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.
    617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.
    618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.
    621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.
    623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.
    626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.
    628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.
    629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.
    631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.
    633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.
    634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.
    635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.
    636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.
    637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.
    638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.
    639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.
    640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.
    642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.
    644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.
    645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.
    646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.
    647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.
    648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.
    649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.
    650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.
    652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.
    653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.
    654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.
    655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.
    656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.
    657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.
    659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.
    661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.
    663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.
    666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.
    667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.
    668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.
    675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.
    676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.
    677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.
    678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.
    679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.
    681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.
    682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.
    684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.
    685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.
    687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.
    688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.
    690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.
    691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.
    692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.
    693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.
    696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.
    697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.
    698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.
    699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.
    700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.
    702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.
    703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.
    704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.
    706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.
    707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.
    708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.
    709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.
    711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.
    712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.
    713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.
    714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.
    715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.
    716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.
    717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.
    718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.
    719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.
    721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.
    722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.
    723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.
    724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.
    725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.
    726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.
    727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.
    728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.
    729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.
    731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).
    733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.
    734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.
    735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.
    736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.
    737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.
    738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.
    739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.
    740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
    742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.
    743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.
    744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.
    745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.
    747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.
    750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.
    752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.
    753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.
    754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.
    755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.
    756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.
    757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.
    759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.
    760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.
    762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.
    763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.
    764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.
    765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.
    766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.
    768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.
    769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.
    770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.
    772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.
    773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.
    774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.
    775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.
    776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.
    777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.
    778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.
    779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.
    780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
    781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.
    782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.
    783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.
    784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.
    785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.
    787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.
    788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.
    789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.
    791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.
    793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.
    794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.
    795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.
    796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.
    797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.
    798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.
    799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.
    800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.
    801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.
    802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.
    803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.
    806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.
    807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.
    808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.
    809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.
    810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.
    812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.
    813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.
    815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.
    816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.
    817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.
    818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.
    819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).
    821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.
    822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.
    825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.
    826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.
    828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.
    829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.
    830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.
    831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.
    832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.
    833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.
    834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.
    835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.
    836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.
    838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.
    839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.
    840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.
    841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.
    842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.
    843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.
    845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.
    848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.
    849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).
    850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.
    852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.
    853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.
    854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.
    855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).
    856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.
    857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.
    858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.
    862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.
    865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.
    866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.
    867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.
    868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.
    869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.
    870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.
    871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.
    872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.
    873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.
    874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.
    876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.
    877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.
    878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.
    879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.
    880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.
    881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.
    882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.
    885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).
    886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.
    887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).
    889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.
    891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.
    894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.
    895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.
    898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.
    899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.
    900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.
    901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.
    902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.
    903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.
    904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

    Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

  • 7 Bibliography

     ■ Aitchison, J. (1987). Noam Chomsky: Consensus and controversy. New York: Falmer Press.
     ■ Anderson, J. R. (1980). Cognitive psychology and its implications. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Anderson, J. R. (1983). The architecture of cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Anderson, J. R. (1995). Cognitive psychology and its implications (4th ed.). New York: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Archilochus (1971). In M. L. West (Ed.), Iambi et elegi graeci (Vol. 1). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Armstrong, D. M. (1990). The causal theory of the mind. In W. G. Lycan (Ed.), Mind and cognition: A reader (pp. 37-47). Cambridge, MA: Basil Blackwell. (Originally published in 1981 in The nature of mind and other essays, Ithaca, NY: University Press).
     ■ Atkins, P. W. (1992). Creation revisited. Oxford: W. H. Freeman & Company.
     ■ Austin, J. L. (1962). How to do things with words. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Bacon, F. (1878). Of the proficience and advancement of learning divine and human. In The works of Francis Bacon (Vol. 1). Cambridge, MA: Hurd & Houghton.
     ■ Bacon, R. (1928). Opus majus (Vol. 2). R. B. Burke (Trans.). Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.
     ■ Bar-Hillel, Y. (1960). The present status of automatic translation of languages. In F. L. Alt (Ed.), Advances in computers (Vol. 1). New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Barr, A., & E. A. Feigenbaum (Eds.) (1981). The handbook of artificial intelligence (Vol. 1). Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
     ■ Barr, A., & E. A. Feigenbaum (Eds.) (1982). The handbook of artificial intelligence (Vol. 2). Los Altos, CA: William Kaufman.
     ■ Barron, F. X. (1963). The needs for order and for disorder as motives in creative activity. In C. W. Taylor & F. X. Barron (Eds.), Scientific creativity: Its rec ognition and development (pp. 153-160). New York: Wiley.
     ■ Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering: A study in experimental and social psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Bartley, S. H. (1969). Principles of perception. London: Harper & Row.
     ■ Barzun, J. (1959). The house of intellect. New York: Harper & Row.
     ■ Beach, F. A., D. O. Hebb, C. T. Morgan & H. W. Nissen (Eds.) (1960). The neu ropsychology of Lashley. New York: McGraw-Hill.
     ■ Berkeley, G. (1996). Principles of human knowledge: Three Dialogues. Oxford: Oxford University Press. (Originally published in 1710.)
     ■ Berlin, I. (1953). The hedgehog and the fox: An essay on Tolstoy's view of history. NY: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Bierwisch, J. (1970). Semantics. In J. Lyons (Ed.), New horizons in linguistics. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
     ■ Black, H. C. (1951). Black's law dictionary. St. Paul, MN: West Publishing.
     ■ Bobrow, D. G., & D. A. Norman (1975). Some principles of memory schemata. In D. G. Bobrow & A. Collins (Eds.), Representation and understanding: Stud ies in Cognitive Science (pp. 131-149). New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Boden, M. A. (1977). Artificial intelligence and natural man. New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Boden, M. A. (1981). Minds and mechanisms. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
     ■ Boden, M. A. (1990a). The creative mind: Myths and mechanisms. London: Cardinal.
     ■ Boden, M. A. (1990b). The philosophy of artificial intelligence. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Boden, M. A. (1994). Precis of The creative mind: Myths and mechanisms. Behavioral and brain sciences 17, 519-570.
     ■ Boden, M. (1996). Creativity. In M. Boden (Ed.), Artificial Intelligence (2nd ed.). San Diego: Academic Press.
     ■ Bolter, J. D. (1984). Turing's man: Western culture in the computer age. Chapel Hill, NC: University of North Carolina Press.
     ■ Bolton, N. (1972). The psychology of thinking. London: Methuen.
     ■ Bourne, L. E. (1973). Some forms of cognition: A critical analysis of several papers. In R. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 313324). Loyola Symposium on Cognitive Psychology (Chicago 1972). Washington, DC: Winston.
     ■ Bransford, J. D., N. S. McCarrell, J. J. Franks & K. E. Nitsch (1977). Toward unexplaining memory. In R. Shaw & J. D. Bransford (Eds.), Perceiving, acting, and knowing (pp. 431-466). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Breger, L. (1981). Freud's unfinished journey. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
     ■ Brehmer, B. (1986). In one word: Not from experience. In H. R. Arkes & K. Hammond (Eds.), Judgment and decision making: An interdisciplinary reader (pp. 705-719). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Bresnan, J. (1978). A realistic transformational grammar. In M. Halle, J. Bresnan & G. A. Miller (Eds.), Linguistic theory and psychological reality (pp. 1-59). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Brislin, R. W., W. J. Lonner & R. M. Thorndike (Eds.) (1973). Cross- cultural research methods. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Bronowski, J. (1977). A sense of the future: Essays in natural philosophy. P. E. Ariotti with R. Bronowski (Eds.). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Bronowski, J. (1978). The origins of knowledge and imagination. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
     ■ Brown, R. O. (1973). A first language: The early stages. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Brown, T. (1970). Lectures on the philosophy of the human mind. In R. Brown (Ed.), Between Hume and Mill: An anthology of British philosophy- 1749- 1843 (pp. 330-387). New York: Random House/Modern Library.
     ■ Bruner, J. S., J. Goodnow & G. Austin (1956). A study of thinking. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Campbell, J. (1982). Grammatical man: Information, entropy, language, and life. New York: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Campbell, J. (1989). The improbable machine. New York: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Carlyle, T. (1966). On heroes, hero- worship and the heroic in history. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press. (Originally published in 1841.)
     ■ Carnap, R. (1959). The elimination of metaphysics through logical analysis of language [Ueberwindung der Metaphysik durch logische Analyse der Sprache]. In A. J. Ayer (Ed.), Logical positivism (pp. 60-81) A. Pap (Trans). New York: Free Press. (Originally published in 1932.)
     ■ Cassirer, E. (1946). Language and myth. New York: Harper and Brothers. Reprinted. New York: Dover Publications, 1953.
     ■ Cattell, R. B., & H. J. Butcher (1970). Creativity and personality. In P. E. Vernon (Ed.), Creativity. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books.
     ■ Caudill, M., & C. Butler (1990). Naturally intelligent systems. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Chandrasekaran, B. (1990). What kind of information processing is intelligence? A perspective on AI paradigms and a proposal. In D. Partridge & R. Wilks (Eds.), The foundations of artificial intelligence: A sourcebook (pp. 14-46). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Charniak, E., & McDermott, D. (1985). Introduction to artificial intelligence. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
     ■ Chase, W. G., & H. A. Simon (1988). The mind's eye in chess. In A. Collins & E. E. Smith (Eds.), Readings in cognitive science: A perspective from psychology and artificial intelligence (pp. 461-493). San Mateo, CA: Kaufmann.
     ■ Cheney, D. L., & R. M. Seyfarth (1990). How monkeys see the world: Inside the mind of another species. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
     ■ Chi, M.T.H., R. Glaser & E. Rees (1982). Expertise in problem solving. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Advances in the psychology of human intelligence (pp. 7-73). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1957). Syntactic structures. The Hague: Mouton. Janua Linguarum.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1964). A transformational approach to syntax. In J. A. Fodor & J. J. Katz (Eds.), The structure of language: Readings in the philosophy of lan guage (pp. 211-245). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1972). Language and mind (enlarged ed.). New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1979). Language and responsibility. New York: Pantheon.
     ■ Chomsky, N. (1986). Knowledge of language: Its nature, origin and use. New York: Praeger Special Studies.
     ■ Churchland, P. (1979). Scientific realism and the plasticity of mind. New York: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Churchland, P. M. (1989). A neurocomputational perspective: The nature of mind and the structure of science. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Churchland, P. S. (1986). Neurophilosophy. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Clark, A. (1996). Philosophical Foundations. In M. A. Boden (Ed.), Artificial in telligence (2nd ed.). San Diego: Academic Press.
     ■ Clark, H. H., & T. B. Carlson (1981). Context for comprehension. In J. Long & A. Baddeley (Eds.), Attention and performance (Vol. 9, pp. 313-330). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Clarke, A. C. (1984). Profiles of the future: An inquiry into the limits of the possible. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
     ■ Claxton, G. (1980). Cognitive psychology: A suitable case for what sort of treatment? In G. Claxton (Ed.), Cognitive psychology: New directions (pp. 1-25). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
     ■ Code, M. (1985). Order and organism. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.
     ■ Collingwood, R. G. (1972). The idea of history. New York: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Coopersmith, S. (1967). The antecedents of self- esteem. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Copland, A. (1952). Music and imagination. London: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Coren, S. (1994). The intelligence of dogs. New York: Bantam Books.
     ■ Cottingham, J. (Ed.) (1996). Western philosophy: An anthology. Oxford: Blackwell Publishers.
     ■ Cox, C. (1926). The early mental traits of three hundred geniuses. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
     ■ Craik, K.J.W. (1943). The nature of explanation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Cronbach, L. J. (1990). Essentials of psychological testing (5th ed.). New York: HarperCollins.
     ■ Cronbach, L. J., & R. E. Snow (1977). Aptitudes and instructional methods. New York: Irvington. Paperback edition, 1981.
     ■ Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1993). The evolving self. New York: Harper Perennial.
     ■ Culler, J. (1976). Ferdinand de Saussure. New York: Penguin Books.
     ■ Curtius, E. R. (1973). European literature and the Latin Middle Ages. W. R. Trask (Trans.). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ D'Alembert, J.L.R. (1963). Preliminary discourse to the encyclopedia of Diderot. R. N. Schwab (Trans.). Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill.
     ■ Damasio, A. (1994). Descartes' error: Emotion, reason, and the human brain. New York: Avon.
     ■ Dampier, W. C. (1966). A history of modern science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Darwin, C. (1911). The life and letters of Charles Darwin (Vol. 1). Francis Darwin (Ed.). New York: Appleton.
     ■ Davidson, D. (1970) Mental events. In L. Foster & J. W. Swanson (Eds.), Experience and theory (pp. 79-101). Amherst: University of Massachussetts Press.
     ■ Davies, P. (1995). About time: Einstein's unfinished revolution. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone.
     ■ Davis, R., & J. J. King (1977). An overview of production systems. In E. Elcock & D. Michie (Eds.), Machine intelligence 8. Chichester, England: Ellis Horwood.
     ■ Davis, R., & D. B. Lenat (1982). Knowledge- based systems in artificial intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.
     ■ Dawkins, R. (1982). The extended phenotype: The gene as the unit of selection. Oxford: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ deKleer, J., & J. S. Brown (1983). Assumptions and ambiguities in mechanistic mental models (1983). In D. Gentner & A. L. Stevens (Eds.), Mental modes (pp. 155-190). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Dennett, D. C. (1978a). Brainstorms: Philosophical essays on mind and psychology. Montgomery, VT: Bradford Books.
     ■ Dennett, D. C. (1978b). Toward a cognitive theory of consciousness. In D. C. Dennett, Brainstorms: Philosophical Essays on Mind and Psychology. Montgomery, VT: Bradford Books.
     ■ Dennett, D. C. (1995). Darwin's dangerous idea: Evolution and the meanings of life. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone.
     ■ Descartes, R. (1897-1910). Traite de l'homme. In Oeuvres de Descartes (Vol. 11, pp. 119-215). Paris: Charles Adam & Paul Tannery. (Originally published in 1634.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1950). Discourse on method. L. J. Lafleur (Trans.). New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1637.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1951). Meditation on first philosophy. L. J. Lafleur (Trans.). New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1641.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1955). The philosophical works of Descartes. E. S. Haldane and G.R.T. Ross (Trans.). New York: Dover. (Originally published in 1911 by Cambridge University Press.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1967). Discourse on method (Pt. V). In E. S. Haldane and G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 106-118). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1637.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1970a). Discourse on method. In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 181-200). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1637.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1970b). Principles of philosophy. In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 178-291). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1644.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1984). Meditations on first philosophy. In J. Cottingham, R. Stoothoff & D. Murduch (Trans.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 2). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641.)
     ■ Descartes, R. (1986). Meditations on first philosophy. J. Cottingham (Trans.). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641 as Med itationes de prima philosophia.)
     ■ deWulf, M. (1956). An introduction to scholastic philosophy. Mineola, NY: Dover Books.
     ■ Dixon, N. F. (1981). Preconscious processing. London: Wiley.
     ■ Doyle, A. C. (1986). The Boscombe Valley mystery. In Sherlock Holmes: The com plete novels and stories (Vol. 1). New York: Bantam.
     ■ Dreyfus, H., & S. Dreyfus (1986). Mind over machine. New York: Free Press.
     ■ Dreyfus, H. L. (1972). What computers can't do: The limits of artificial intelligence (revised ed.). New York: Harper & Row.
     ■ Dreyfus, H. L., & S. E. Dreyfus (1986). Mind over machine: The power of human intuition and expertise in the era of the computer. New York: Free Press.
     ■ Edelman, G. M. (1992). Bright air, brilliant fire: On the matter of the mind. New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Ehrenzweig, A. (1967). The hidden order of art. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.
     ■ Einstein, A., & L. Infeld (1938). The evolution of physics. New York: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Eisenstein, S. (1947). Film sense. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World.
     ■ Everdell, W. R. (1997). The first moderns. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
     ■ Eysenck, M. W. (1977). Human memory: Theory, research and individual difference. Oxford: Pergamon.
     ■ Eysenck, M. W. (1982). Attention and arousal: Cognition and performance. Berlin: Springer.
     ■ Eysenck, M. W. (1984). A handbook of cognitive psychology. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Fancher, R. E. (1979). Pioneers of psychology. New York: W. W. Norton.
     ■ Farrell, B. A. (1981). The standing of psychoanalysis. New York: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Feldman, D. H. (1980). Beyond universals in cognitive development. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
     ■ Fetzer, J. H. (1996). Philosophy and cognitive science (2nd ed.). New York: Paragon House.
     ■ Finke, R. A. (1990). Creative imagery: Discoveries and inventions in visualization. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Flanagan, O. (1991). The science of the mind. Cambridge MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Fodor, J. (1983). The modularity of mind. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Frege, G. (1972). Conceptual notation. T. W. Bynum (Trans.). Oxford: Clarendon Press. (Originally published in 1879.)
     ■ Frege, G. (1979). Logic. In H. Hermes, F. Kambartel & F. Kaulbach (Eds.), Gottlob Frege: Posthumous writings. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. (Originally published in 1879-1891.)
     ■ Freud, S. (1959). Creative writers and day-dreaming. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 9, pp. 143-153). London: Hogarth Press.
     ■ Freud, S. (1966). Project for a scientific psychology. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The stan dard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 1, pp. 295-398). London: Hogarth Press. (Originally published in 1950 as Aus den AnfaЁngen der Psychoanalyse, in London by Imago Publishing.)
     ■ Freud, S. (1976). Lecture 18-Fixation to traumas-the unconscious. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 16, p. 285). London: Hogarth Press.
     ■ Galileo, G. (1990). Il saggiatore [The assayer]. In S. Drake (Ed.), Discoveries and opinions of Galileo. New York: Anchor Books. (Originally published in 1623.)
     ■ Gassendi, P. (1970). Letter to Descartes. In "Objections and replies." In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 2, pp. 179-240). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641.)
     ■ Gazzaniga, M. S. (1988). Mind matters: How mind and brain interact to create our conscious lives. Boston: Houghton Mifflin in association with MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Genesereth, M. R., & N. J. Nilsson (1987). Logical foundations of artificial intelligence. Palo Alto, CA: Morgan Kaufmann.
     ■ Ghiselin, B. (1952). The creative process. New York: Mentor.
     ■ Ghiselin, B. (1985). The creative process. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1952.)
     ■ Gilhooly, K. J. (1996). Thinking: Directed, undirected and creative (3rd ed.). London: Academic Press.
     ■ Glass, A. L., K. J. Holyoak & J. L. Santa (1979). Cognition. Reading, MA: AddisonWesley.
     ■ Goody, J. (1977). The domestication of the savage mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Gruber, H. E. (1980). Darwin on man: A psychological study of scientific creativity (2nd ed.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
     ■ Gruber, H. E., & S. Davis (1988). Inching our way up Mount Olympus: The evolving systems approach to creative thinking. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), The nature of creativity: Contemporary psychological perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Guthrie, E. R. (1972). The psychology of learning. New York: Harper. (Originally published in 1935.)
     ■ Habermas, J. (1972). Knowledge and human interests. Boston: Beacon Press.
     ■ Hadamard, J. (1945). The psychology of invention in the mathematical field. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ Hand, D. J. (1985). Artificial intelligence and psychiatry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Harris, M. (1981). The language myth. London: Duckworth.
     ■ Haugeland, J. (Ed.) (1981). Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Haugeland, J. (1981a). The nature and plausibility of cognitivism. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 243-281). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Haugeland, J. (1981b). Semantic engines: An introduction to mind design. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 1-34). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Haugeland, J. (1985). Artificial intelligence: The very idea. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Hawkes, T. (1977). Structuralism and semiotics. Berkeley: University of California Press.
     ■ Hebb, D. O. (1949). The organisation of behaviour. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Hebb, D. O. (1958). A textbook of psychology. Philadelphia: Saunders.
     ■ Hegel, G.W.F. (1910). The phenomenology of mind. J. B. Baille (Trans.). London: Sonnenschein. (Originally published as Phaenomenologie des Geistes, 1807.)
     ■ Heisenberg, W. (1958). Physics and philosophy. New York: Harper & Row.
     ■ Hempel, C. G. (1966). Philosophy of natural science. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall.
     ■ Herman, A. (1997). The idea of decline in Western history. New York: Free Press.
     ■ Herrnstein, R. J., & E. G. Boring (Eds.) (1965). A source book in the history of psy chology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Herzmann, E. (1964). Mozart's creative process. In P. H. Lang (Ed.), The creative world of Mozart (pp. 17-30). London: Oldbourne Press.
     ■ Hilgard, E. R. (1957). Introduction to psychology. London: Methuen.
     ■ Hobbes, T. (1651). Leviathan. London: Crooke.
     ■ Hofstadter, D. R. (1979). Goedel, Escher, Bach: An eternal golden braid. New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Holliday, S. G., & M. J. Chandler (1986). Wisdom: Explorations in adult competence. Basel, Switzerland: Karger.
     ■ Horn, J. L. (1986). In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Advances in the psychology of human intelligence (Vol. 3). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
     ■ Hull, C. (1943). Principles of behavior. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
     ■ Hume, D. (1955). An inquiry concerning human understanding. New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1748.)
     ■ Hume, D. (1975). An enquiry concerning human understanding. In L. A. SelbyBigge (Ed.), Hume's enquiries (3rd. ed., revised P. H. Nidditch). Oxford: Clarendon. (Spelling and punctuation revised.) (Originally published in 1748.)
     ■ Hume, D. (1978). A treatise of human nature. L. A. Selby-Bigge (Ed.), Hume's enquiries (3rd. ed., revised P. H. Nidditch). Oxford: Clarendon. (With some modifications of spelling and punctuation.) (Originally published in 1690.)
     ■ Hunt, E. (1973). The memory we must have. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language. (pp. 343-371) San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Husserl, E. (1960). Cartesian meditations. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.
     ■ Inhelder, B., & J. Piaget (1958). The growth of logical thinking from childhood to adolescence. New York: Basic Books. (Originally published in 1955 as De la logique de l'enfant a` la logique de l'adolescent. [Paris: Presses Universitaire de France])
     ■ James, W. (1890a). The principles of psychology (Vol. 1). New York: Dover Books.
     ■ James, W. (1890b). The principles of psychology. New York: Henry Holt.
     ■ Jevons, W. S. (1900). The principles of science (2nd ed.). London: Macmillan.
     ■ Johnson, G. (1986). Machinery of the mind: Inside the new science of artificial intelli gence. New York: Random House.
     ■ Johnson, M. L. (1988). Mind, language, machine. New York: St. Martin's Press.
     ■ Johnson-Laird, P. N. (1983). Mental models: Toward a cognitive science of language, inference, and consciousness. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Johnson-Laird, P. N. (1988). The computer and the mind: An introduction to cognitive science. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Jones, E. (1961). The life and work of Sigmund Freud. L. Trilling & S. Marcus (Eds.). London: Hogarth.
     ■ Jones, R. V. (1985). Complementarity as a way of life. In A. P. French & P. J. Kennedy (Eds.), Niels Bohr: A centenary volume. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Kant, I. (1933). Critique of Pure Reason (2nd ed.). N. K. Smith (Trans.). London: Macmillan. (Originally published in 1781 as Kritik der reinen Vernunft.)
     ■ Kant, I. (1891). Solution of the general problems of the Prolegomena. In E. Belfort (Trans.), Kant's Prolegomena. London: Bell. (With minor modifications.) (Originally published in 1783.)
     ■ Katona, G. (1940). Organizing and memorizing: Studies in the psychology of learning and teaching. New York: Columbia University Press.
     ■ Kaufman, A. S. (1979). Intelligent testing with the WISC-R. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Koestler, A. (1964). The act of creation. New York: Arkana (Penguin).
     ■ Kohlberg, L. (1971). From is to ought. In T. Mischel (Ed.), Cognitive development and epistemology. (pp. 151-235) New York: Academic Press.
     ■ KoЁhler, W. (1925). The mentality of apes. New York: Liveright.
     ■ KoЁhler, W. (1927). The mentality of apes (2nd ed.). Ella Winter (Trans.). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
     ■ KoЁhler, W. (1930). Gestalt psychology. London: G. Bell.
     ■ KoЁhler, W. (1947). Gestalt psychology. New York: Liveright.
     ■ KoЁhler, W. (1969). The task of Gestalt psychology. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ Kuhn, T. (1970). The structure of scientific revolutions (2nd ed.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
     ■ Langer, E. J. (1989). Mindfulness. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
     ■ Langer, S. (1962). Philosophical sketches. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
     ■ Langley, P., H. A. Simon, G. L. Bradshaw & J. M. Zytkow (1987). Scientific dis covery: Computational explorations of the creative process. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Lashley, K. S. (1951). The problem of serial order in behavior. In L. A. Jeffress (Ed.), Cerebral mechanisms in behavior, the Hixon Symposium (pp. 112-146) New York: Wiley.
     ■ LeDoux, J. E., & W. Hirst (1986). Mind and brain: Dialogues in cognitive neuroscience. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Lehnert, W. (1978). The process of question answering. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Leiber, J. (1991). Invitation to cognitive science. Oxford: Blackwell.
     ■ Lenat, D. B., & G. Harris (1978). Designing a rule system that searches for scientific discoveries. In D. A. Waterman & F. Hayes-Roth (Eds.), Pattern directed inference systems (pp. 25-52) New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Levenson, T. (1995). Measure for measure: A musical history of science. New York: Touchstone. (Originally published in 1994.)
     ■ Leґvi-Strauss, C. (1963). Structural anthropology. C. Jacobson & B. Grundfest Schoepf (Trans.). New York: Basic Books. (Originally published in 1958.)
     ■ Levine, M. W., & J. M. Schefner (1981). Fundamentals of sensation and perception. London: Addison-Wesley.
     ■ Lewis, C. I. (1946). An analysis of knowledge and valuation. LaSalle, IL: Open Court.
     ■ Lighthill, J. (1972). A report on artificial intelligence. Unpublished manuscript, Science Research Council.
     ■ Lipman, M., A. M. Sharp & F. S. Oscanyan (1980). Philosophy in the classroom. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.
     ■ Lippmann, W. (1965). Public opinion. New York: Free Press. (Originally published in 1922.)
     ■ Locke, J. (1956). An essay concerning human understanding. Chicago: Henry Regnery Co. (Originally published in 1690.)
     ■ Locke, J. (1975). An essay concerning human understanding. P. H. Nidditch (Ed.). Oxford: Clarendon. (Originally published in 1690.) (With spelling and punctuation modernized and some minor modifications of phrasing.)
     ■ Lopate, P. (1994). The art of the personal essay. New York: Doubleday/Anchor Books.
     ■ Lorimer, F. (1929). The growth of reason. London: Kegan Paul. Machlup, F., & U. Mansfield (Eds.) (1983). The study of information. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Manguel, A. (1996). A history of reading. New York: Viking.
     ■ Margolis, H. (1987). Patterns, thinking, and cognition. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
     ■ Markey, J. F. (1928). The symbolic process. London: Kegan Paul.
     ■ Martin, R. M. (1969). On Ziff's "Natural and formal languages." In S. Hook (Ed.), Language and philosophy: A symposium (pp. 249-263). New York: New York University Press.
     ■ Mazlish, B. (1993). The fourth discontinuity: the co- evolution of humans and machines. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
     ■ McCarthy, J., & P. J. Hayes (1969). Some philosophical problems from the standpoint of artificial intelligence. In B. Meltzer & D. Michie (Eds.), Machine intelligence 4. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.
     ■ McClelland, J. L., D. E. Rumelhart & G. E. Hinton (1986). The appeal of parallel distributed processing. In D. E. Rumelhart, J. L. McClelland & the PDP Research Group (Eds.), Parallel distributed processing: Explorations in the mi crostructure of cognition (Vol. 1, pp. 3-40). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/ Bradford Books.
     ■ McCorduck, P. (1979). Machines who think. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ McLaughlin, T. (1970). Music and communication. London: Faber & Faber.
     ■ Mednick, S. A. (1962). The associative basis of the creative process. Psychological Review 69, 431-436.
     ■ Meehl, P. E., & C. J. Golden (1982). Taxometric methods. In Kendall, P. C., & Butcher, J. N. (Eds.), Handbook of research methods in clinical psychology (pp. 127-182). New York: Wiley.
     ■ Mehler, J., E.C.T. Walker & M. Garrett (Eds.) (1982). Perspectives on mental rep resentation: Experimental and theoretical studies of cognitive processes and ca pacities. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Mill, J. S. (1900). A system of logic, ratiocinative and inductive: Being a connected view of the principles of evidence and the methods of scientific investigation. London: Longmans, Green.
     ■ Miller, G. A. (1979, June). A very personal history. Talk to the Cognitive Science Workshop, Cambridge, MA.
     ■ Miller, J. (1983). States of mind. New York: Pantheon Books.
     ■ Minsky, M. (1975). A framework for representing knowledge. In P. H. Winston (Ed.), The psychology of computer vision (pp. 211-277). New York: McGrawHill.
     ■ Minsky, M., & S. Papert (1973). Artificial intelligence. Condon Lectures, Oregon State System of Higher Education, Eugene, Oregon.
     ■ Minsky, M. L. (1986). The society of mind. New York: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Mischel, T. (1976). Psychological explanations and their vicissitudes. In J. K. Cole & W. J. Arnold (Eds.), Nebraska Symposium on motivation (Vol. 23). Lincoln, NB: University of Nebraska Press.
     ■ Morford, M.P.O., & R. J. Lenardon (1995). Classical mythology (5th ed.). New York: Longman.
     ■ Murdoch, I. (1954). Under the net. New York: Penguin.
     ■ Nagel, E. (1959). Methodological issues in psychoanalytic theory. In S. Hook (Ed.), Psychoanalysis, scientific method, and philosophy: A symposium. New York: New York University Press.
     ■ Nagel, T. (1979). Mortal questions. London: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Nagel, T. (1986). The view from nowhere. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Neisser, U. (1967). Cognitive psychology. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
     ■ Neisser, U. (1972). Changing conceptions of imagery. In P. W. Sheehan (Ed.), The function and nature of imagery (pp. 233-251). London: Academic Press.
     ■ Neisser, U. (1976). Cognition and reality. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Neisser, U. (1978). Memory: What are the important questions? In M. M. Gruneberg, P. E. Morris & R. N. Sykes (Eds.), Practical aspects of memory (pp. 3-24). London: Academic Press.
     ■ Neisser, U. (1979). The concept of intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg & D. K. Detterman (Eds.), Human intelligence: Perspectives on its theory and measurement (pp. 179-190). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
     ■ Nersessian, N. (1992). How do scientists think? Capturing the dynamics of conceptual change in science. In R. N. Giere (Ed.), Cognitive models of science (pp. 3-44). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
     ■ Newell, A. (1973a). Artificial intelligence and the concept of mind. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language (pp. 1-60). San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Newell, A. (1973b). You can't play 20 questions with nature and win. In W. G. Chase (Ed.), Visual information processing (pp. 283-310). New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Newell, A., & H. A. Simon (1963). GPS: A program that simulates human thought. In E. A. Feigenbaum & J. Feldman (Eds.), Computers and thought (pp. 279-293). New York & McGraw-Hill.
     ■ Newell, A., & H. A. Simon (1972). Human problem solving. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
     ■ Nietzsche, F. (1966). Beyond good and evil. W. Kaufmann (Trans.). New York: Vintage. (Originally published in 1885.)
     ■ Nilsson, N. J. (1971). Problem- solving methods in artificial intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.
     ■ Nussbaum, M. C. (1978). Aristotle's Princeton University Press. De Motu Anamalium. Princeton, NJ:
     ■ Oersted, H. C. (1920). Thermo-electricity. In Kirstine Meyer (Ed.), H. C. Oersted, Natuurvidenskabelige Skrifter (Vol. 2). Copenhagen: n.p. (Originally published in 1830 in The Edinburgh encyclopaedia.)
     ■ Ong, W. J. (1982). Orality and literacy: The technologizing of the word. London: Methuen.
     ■ Onians, R. B. (1954). The origins of European thought. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Osgood, C. E. (1960). Method and theory in experimental psychology. New York: Oxford University Press. (Originally published in 1953.)
     ■ Osgood, C. E. (1966). Language universals and psycholinguistics. In J. H. Greenberg (Ed.), Universals of language (2nd ed., pp. 299-322). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Palmer, R. E. (1969). Hermeneutics. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.
     ■ Peirce, C. S. (1934). Some consequences of four incapacities-Man, a sign. In C. Hartsborne & P. Weiss (Eds.), Collected papers of Charles Saunders Peirce (Vol. 5, pp. 185-189). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Penfield, W. (1959). In W. Penfield & L. Roberts, Speech and brain mechanisms. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ Penrose, R. (1994). Shadows of the mind: A search for the missing science of conscious ness. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Perkins, D. N. (1981). The mind's best work. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Peterfreund, E. (1986). The heuristic approach to psychoanalytic therapy. In
     ■ J. Reppen (Ed.), Analysts at work, (pp. 127-144). Hillsdale, NJ: Analytic Press.
     ■ Piaget, J. (1952). The origin of intelligence in children. New York: International Universities Press. (Originally published in 1936.)
     ■ Piaget, J. (1954). Le langage et les opeґrations intellectuelles. Proble` mes de psycho linguistique. Symposium de l'Association de Psychologie Scientifique de Langue Francёaise. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
     ■ Piaget, J. (1977). Problems of equilibration. In H. E. Gruber & J. J. Voneche (Eds.), The essential Piaget (pp. 838-841). London: Routlege & Kegan Paul. (Originally published in 1975 as L'eґquilibration des structures cognitives [Paris: Presses Universitaires de France].)
     ■ Piaget, J., & B. Inhelder. (1973). Memory and intelligence. New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Pinker, S. (1994). The language instinct. New York: Morrow.
     ■ Pinker, S. (1996). Facts about human language relevant to its evolution. In J.-P. Changeux & J. Chavaillon (Eds.), Origins of the human brain. A symposium of the Fyssen foundation (pp. 262-283). Oxford: Clarendon Press. Planck, M. (1949). Scientific autobiography and other papers. F. Gaynor (Trans.). New York: Philosophical Library.
     ■ Planck, M. (1990). Wissenschaftliche Selbstbiographie. W. Berg (Ed.). Halle, Germany: Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher Leopoldina.
     ■ Plato (1892). Meno. In The Dialogues of Plato (B. Jowett, Trans.; Vol. 2). New York: Clarendon. (Originally published circa 380 B.C.)
     ■ Poincareґ, H. (1913). Mathematical creation. In The foundations of science. G. B. Halsted (Trans.). New York: Science Press.
     ■ Poincareґ, H. (1921). The foundations of science: Science and hypothesis, the value of science, science and method. G. B. Halstead (Trans.). New York: Science Press.
     ■ Poincareґ, H. (1929). The foundations of science: Science and hypothesis, the value of science, science and method. New York: Science Press.
     ■ Poincareґ, H. (1952). Science and method. F. Maitland (Trans.) New York: Dover.
     ■ Polya, G. (1945). How to solve it. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ Polanyi, M. (1958). Personal knowledge. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
     ■ Popper, K. (1968). Conjectures and refutations: The growth of scientific knowledge. New York: Harper & Row/Basic Books.
     ■ Popper, K., & J. Eccles (1977). The self and its brain. New York: Springer-Verlag.
     ■ Popper, K. R. (1959). The logic of scientific discovery. London: Hutchinson.
     ■ Putnam, H. (1975). Mind, language and reality: Philosophical papers (Vol. 2). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Putnam, H. (1987). The faces of realism. LaSalle, IL: Open Court.
     ■ Pylyshyn, Z. W. (1981). The imagery debate: Analog media versus tacit knowledge. In N. Block (Ed.), Imagery (pp. 151-206). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Pylyshyn, Z. W. (1984). Computation and cognition: Towards a foundation for cog nitive science. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Quillian, M. R. (1968). Semantic memory. In M. Minsky (Ed.), Semantic information processing (pp. 216-260). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Quine, W.V.O. (1960). Word and object. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Rabbitt, P.M.A., & S. Dornic (Eds.). Attention and performance (Vol. 5). London: Academic Press.
     ■ Rawlins, G.J.E. (1997). Slaves of the Machine: The quickening of computer technology. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.
     ■ Reid, T. (1970). An inquiry into the human mind on the principles of common sense. In R. Brown (Ed.), Between Hume and Mill: An anthology of British philosophy- 1749- 1843 (pp. 151-178). New York: Random House/Modern Library.
     ■ Reitman, W. (1970). What does it take to remember? In D. A. Norman (Ed.), Models of human memory (pp. 470-510). London: Academic Press.
     ■ Ricoeur, P. (1974). Structure and hermeneutics. In D. I. Ihde (Ed.), The conflict of interpretations: Essays in hermeneutics (pp. 27-61). Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.
     ■ Robinson, D. N. (1986). An intellectual history of psychology. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
     ■ Rorty, R. (1979). Philosophy and the mirror of nature. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
     ■ Rosch, E. (1977). Human categorization. In N. Warren (Ed.), Studies in cross cultural psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 1-49) London: Academic Press.
     ■ Rosch, E. (1978). Principles of categorization. In E. Rosch & B. B. Lloyd (Eds.), Cognition and categorization (pp. 27-48). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Rosch, E., & B. B. Lloyd (1978). Principles of categorization. In E. Rosch & B. B. Lloyd (Eds.), Cognition and categorization. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Rose, S. (1970). The chemistry of life. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
     ■ Rose, S. (1976). The conscious brain (updated ed.). New York: Random House.
     ■ Rose, S. (1993). The making of memory: From molecules to mind. New York: Anchor Books. (Originally published in 1992)
     ■ Roszak, T. (1994). The cult of information: A neo- Luddite treatise on high- tech, artificial intelligence, and the true art of thinking (2nd ed.). Berkeley: University of California Press.
     ■ Royce, J. R., & W. W. Rozeboom (Eds.) (1972). The psychology of knowing. New York: Gordon & Breach.
     ■ Rumelhart, D. E. (1977). Introduction to human information processing. New York: Wiley.
     ■ Rumelhart, D. E. (1980). Schemata: The building blocks of cognition. In R. J. Spiro, B. Bruce & W. F. Brewer (Eds.), Theoretical issues in reading comprehension. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Rumelhart, D. E., & J. L. McClelland (1986). On learning the past tenses of English verbs. In J. L. McClelland & D. E. Rumelhart (Eds.), Parallel distributed processing: Explorations in the microstructure of cognition (Vol. 2). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Rumelhart, D. E., P. Smolensky, J. L. McClelland & G. E. Hinton (1986). Schemata and sequential thought processes in PDP models. In J. L. McClelland, D. E. Rumelhart & the PDP Research Group (Eds.), Parallel Distributed Processing (Vol. 2, pp. 7-57). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Russell, B. (1927). An outline of philosophy. London: G. Allen & Unwin.
     ■ Russell, B. (1961). History of Western philosophy. London: George Allen & Unwin.
     ■ Russell, B. (1965). How I write. In Portraits from memory and other essays. London: Allen & Unwin.
     ■ Russell, B. (1992). In N. Griffin (Ed.), The selected letters of Bertrand Russell (Vol. 1), The private years, 1884- 1914. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. Ryecroft, C. (1966). Psychoanalysis observed. London: Constable.
     ■ Sagan, C. (1978). The dragons of Eden: Speculations on the evolution of human intel ligence. New York: Ballantine Books.
     ■ Salthouse, T. A. (1992). Expertise as the circumvention of human processing limitations. In K. A. Ericsson & J. Smith (Eds.), Toward a general theory of expertise: Prospects and limits (pp. 172-194). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Sanford, A. J. (1987). The mind of man: Models of human understanding. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
     ■ Sapir, E. (1921). Language. New York: Harcourt, Brace, and World.
     ■ Sapir, E. (1964). Culture, language, and personality. Berkeley: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1941.)
     ■ Sapir, E. (1985). The status of linguistics as a science. In D. G. Mandelbaum (Ed.), Selected writings of Edward Sapir in language, culture and personality (pp. 160166). Berkeley: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1929).
     ■ Scardmalia, M., & C. Bereiter (1992). Literate expertise. In K. A. Ericsson & J. Smith (Eds.), Toward a general theory of expertise: Prospects and limits (pp. 172-194). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Schafer, R. (1954). Psychoanalytic interpretation in Rorschach testing. New York: Grune & Stratten.
     ■ Schank, R. C. (1973). Identification of conceptualizations underlying natural language. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language (pp. 187-248). San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Schank, R. C. (1976). The role of memory in language processing. In C. N. Cofer (Ed.), The structure of human memory. (pp. 162-189) San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Schank, R. C. (1986). Explanation patterns: Understanding mechanically and creatively. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Schank, R. C., & R. P. Abelson (1977). Scripts, plans, goals, and understanding. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ SchroЁdinger, E. (1951). Science and humanism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Searle, J. R. (1981a). Minds, brains, and programs. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 282-306). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Searle, J. R. (1981b). Minds, brains and programs. In D. Hofstadter & D. Dennett (Eds.), The mind's I (pp. 353-373). New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Searle, J. R. (1983). Intentionality. New York: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Serres, M. (1982). The origin of language: Biology, information theory, and thermodynamics. M. Anderson (Trans.). In J. V. Harari & D. F. Bell (Eds.), Hermes: Literature, science, philosophy (pp. 71-83). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
     ■ Simon, H. A. (1966). Scientific discovery and the psychology of problem solving. In R. G. Colodny (Ed.), Mind and cosmos: Essays in contemporary science and philosophy (pp. 22-40). Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press.
     ■ Simon, H. A. (1979). Models of thought. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
     ■ Simon, H. A. (1989). The scientist as a problem solver. In D. Klahr & K. Kotovsky (Eds.), Complex information processing: The impact of Herbert Simon. Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Simon, H. A., & C. Kaplan (1989). Foundations of cognitive science. In M. Posner (Ed.), Foundations of cognitive science (pp. 1-47). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Simonton, D. K. (1988). Creativity, leadership and chance. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), The nature of creativity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Skinner, B. F. (1974). About behaviorism. New York: Knopf.
     ■ Smith, E. E. (1988). Concepts and thought. In J. Sternberg & E. E. Smith (Eds.), The psychology of human thought (pp. 19-49). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Smith, E. E. (1990). Thinking: Introduction. In D. N. Osherson & E. E. Smith (Eds.), Thinking. An invitation to cognitive science. (Vol. 3, pp. 1-2). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Socrates. (1958). Meno. In E. H. Warmington & P. O. Rouse (Eds.), Great dialogues of Plato W.H.D. Rouse (Trans.). New York: New American Library. (Original publication date unknown.)
     ■ Solso, R. L. (1974). Theories of retrieval. In R. L. Solso (Ed.), Theories in cognitive psychology. Potomac, MD: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Spencer, H. (1896). The principles of psychology. New York: Appleton-CenturyCrofts.
     ■ Steiner, G. (1975). After Babel: Aspects of language and translation. New York: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Sternberg, R. J. (1977). Intelligence, information processing, and analogical reasoning. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
     ■ Sternberg, R. J. (1994). Intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg, Thinking and problem solving. San Diego: Academic Press.
     ■ Sternberg, R. J., & J. E. Davidson (1985). Cognitive development in gifted and talented. In F. D. Horowitz & M. O'Brien (Eds.), The gifted and talented (pp. 103-135). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
     ■ Storr, A. (1993). The dynamics of creation. New York: Ballantine Books. (Originally published in 1972.)
     ■ Stumpf, S. E. (1994). Philosophy: History and problems (5th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
     ■ Sulloway, F. J. (1996). Born to rebel: Birth order, family dynamics, and creative lives. New York: Random House/Vintage Books.
     ■ Thorndike, E. L. (1906). Principles of teaching. New York: A. G. Seiler.
     ■ Thorndike, E. L. (1970). Animal intelligence: Experimental studies. Darien, CT: Hafner Publishing Co. (Originally published in 1911.)
     ■ Titchener, E. B. (1910). A textbook of psychology. New York: Macmillan.
     ■ Titchener, E. B. (1914). A primer of psychology. New York: Macmillan.
     ■ Toulmin, S. (1957). The philosophy of science. London: Hutchinson.
     ■ Tulving, E. (1972). Episodic and semantic memory. In E. Tulving & W. Donaldson (Eds.), Organisation of memory. London: Academic Press.
     ■ Turing, A. (1946). In B. E. Carpenter & R. W. Doran (Eds.), ACE reports of 1946 and other papers. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Turkle, S. (1984). Computers and the second self: Computers and the human spirit. New York: Simon & Schuster.
     ■ Tyler, S. A. (1978). The said and the unsaid: Mind, meaning, and culture. New York: Academic Press.
     ■ van Heijenoort (Ed.) (1967). From Frege to Goedel. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Varela, F. J. (1984). The creative circle: Sketches on the natural history of circularity. In P. Watzlawick (Ed.), The invented reality (pp. 309-324). New York: W. W. Norton.
     ■ Voltaire (1961). On the Penseґs of M. Pascal. In Philosophical letters (pp. 119-146). E. Dilworth (Trans.). Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill.
     ■ Wagman, M. (1997a). Cognitive science and the symbolic operations of human and artificial intelligence: Theory and research into the intellective processes. Westport, CT: Praeger.
     ■ Wagman, M. (1997b). The general unified theory of intelligence: Central conceptions and specific application to domains of cognitive science. Westport, CT: Praeger.
     ■ Wagman, M. (1998a). Cognitive science and the mind- body problem: From philosophy to psychology to artificial intelligence to imaging of the brain. Westport, CT: Praeger.
     ■ Wagman, M. (1999). The human mind according to artificial intelligence: Theory, re search, and implications. Westport, CT: Praeger.
     ■ Wall, R. (1972). Introduction to mathematical linguistics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
     ■ Wallas, G. (1926). The Art of Thought. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co.
     ■ Wason, P. (1977). Self contradictions. In P. Johnson-Laird & P. Wason (Eds.), Thinking: Readings in cognitive science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
     ■ Wason, P. C., & P. N. Johnson-Laird. (1972). Psychology of reasoning: Structure and content. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
     ■ Watson, J. (1930). Behaviorism. New York: W. W. Norton.
     ■ Watzlawick, P. (1984). Epilogue. In P. Watzlawick (Ed.), The invented reality. New York: W. W. Norton, 1984.
     ■ Weinberg, S. (1977). The first three minutes: A modern view of the origin of the uni verse. New York: Basic Books.
     ■ Weisberg, R. W. (1986). Creativity: Genius and other myths. New York: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Weizenbaum, J. (1976). Computer power and human reason: From judgment to cal culation. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
     ■ Wertheimer, M. (1945). Productive thinking. New York: Harper & Bros.
     ■ Whitehead, A. N. (1925). Science and the modern world. New York: Macmillan.
     ■ Whorf, B. L. (1956). In J. B. Carroll (Ed.), Language, thought and reality: Selected writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Whyte, L. L. (1962). The unconscious before Freud. New York: Anchor Books.
     ■ Wiener, N. (1954). The human use of human beings. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
     ■ Wiener, N. (1964). God & Golem, Inc.: A comment on certain points where cybernetics impinges on religion. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Winograd, T. (1972). Understanding natural language. New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Winston, P. H. (1987). Artificial intelligence: A perspective. In E. L. Grimson & R. S. Patil (Eds.), AI in the 1980s and beyond (pp. 1-12). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
     ■ Winston, P. H. (Ed.) (1975). The psychology of computer vision. New York: McGrawHill.
     ■ Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
     ■ Wittgenstein, L. (1958). The blue and brown books. New York: Harper Colophon.
     ■ Woods, W. A. (1975). What's in a link: Foundations for semantic networks. In D. G. Bobrow & A. Collins (Eds.), Representations and understanding: Studies in cognitive science (pp. 35-84). New York: Academic Press.
     ■ Woodworth, R. S. (1938). Experimental psychology. New York: Holt; London: Methuen (1939).
     ■ Wundt, W. (1904). Principles of physiological psychology (Vol. 1). E. B. Titchener (Trans.). New York: Macmillan.
     ■ Wundt, W. (1907). Lectures on human and animal psychology. J. E. Creighton & E. B. Titchener (Trans.). New York: Macmillan.
     ■ Young, J. Z. (1978). Programs of the brain. New York: Oxford University Press.
     ■ Ziman, J. (1978). Reliable knowledge: An exploration of the grounds for belief in science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

    Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Bibliography

  • 8 in

    1.
    in (old forms endŏ and indŭ, freq. in ante-class. poets; cf. Enn. ap. Gell. 12, 4; id. ap. Macr. S. 6, 2; Lucil. ap. Lact. 5, 9, 20; Lucr. 2, 1096; 5, 102; 6, 890 et saep.), prep. with abl. and acc. [kindr. with Sanscr. an; Greek en, en-tha, en-then, eis, i. e. en-s, ana; Goth. ana; Germ. in], denotes either rest or motion within or into a place or thing; opp. to ex; in, within, on, upon, among, at; into, to, towards.
    I.
    With abl.
    A.
    In space.
    1.
    Lit., in (with abl. of the place or thing in which):

    aliorum fructus in terra est, aliorum et extra,

    Plin. 19, 4, 22, § 61:

    alii in corde, alii in cerebro dixerunt animi esse sedem et locum,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 19:

    eo in rostris sedente suasit Serviliam legem Crassus,

    id. Brut. 43, 161:

    qui sunt cives in eadem re publica,

    id. Rep. 1, 32 fin.:

    facillimam in ea re publica esse concordiam, in qua idem conducat omnibus,

    id. ib.:

    T. Labienus ex loco superiore, quae res in nostris castris gererentur, conspicatus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 26, 4:

    quod si in scaena, id est in contione verum valet, etc.,

    Cic. Lael. 26, 97:

    in foro palam Syracusis,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81:

    plures in eo loco sine vulnere quam in proelio aut fuga intereunt,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 35:

    tulit de caede, quae in Appia via facta esset,

    Cic. Mil. 6, 15:

    in via fornicata,

    Liv. 22, 36:

    vigebat in illa domo mos patrius et disciplina,

    Cic. de Sen. 11, 37:

    in domo furtum factum ab eo qui domi fuit,

    Quint. 5, 10, 16:

    nupta in domo,

    Liv. 6, 34, 9:

    copias in castris continent,

    in, within, Caes. B. C. 1, 66:

    cum in angusto quodam pulpito stans diceret,

    Quint. 11, 3, 130:

    se ac suos in vehiculo conspici,

    Liv. 5, 40, 10:

    malo in illa tua sedecula sedere, quam in istorum sella curuli,

    Cic. Att. 4, 10:

    sedere in solio,

    id. Fin. 2, 21, 66:

    Albae constiterant, in urbe opportuna,

    id. Phil. 4, 2, 6. —

    Sometimes, also, with names of places: omnes se ultro sectari in Epheso memorat mulieres,

    Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 182:

    heri aliquot adolescentuli coiimus in Piraeo,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 4, 1:

    navis et in Cajeta est parata nobis et Brundisii,

    Cic. Att. 8, 3, 6:

    complures (naves) in Hispali faciendas curavit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 18:

    caesos in Marathone ac Salamine,

    Quint. 12, 10, 24:

    in Berenice urbe Troglodytarum,

    Plin. 2, 73, 75, § 183.—
    2.
    In indicating a multitude or number, of, in, or among which a person or thing is, in, among (= gen. part.):

    in his poeta hic nomen profitetur suum,

    Ter. Eun. prol. 3:

    Thales, qui sapientissimus in septem fuit,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 11, 26:

    peto ut eum complectare, diligas, in tuis habeas,

    id. Fam. 13, 78, 2; cf.:

    in perditis et desperatis,

    id. ib. 13, 56, 1:

    omnia quae secundum naturam fiunt, sunt habenda in bonis,

    id. de Sen. 19, 71:

    dolor in maximis malis ducitur,

    id. Leg. 1, 11, 31:

    justissimus unus in Teucris,

    Verg. A. 2, 426:

    cecidere in pugna ad duo milia... in his quatuor Romani centuriones,

    Liv. 27, 12, 16:

    in diis et feminae sunt,

    Lact. 1, 16, 17.—
    3.
    Of analogous relations of place or position:

    sedere in equo,

    on horseback, id. Verr. 2, 5, 10:

    quid legati in equis,

    id. Pis. 25, 60:

    sedere in leone,

    Plin. 35, 10, 36, § 109:

    in eo flumine pons erat,

    on, over, Caes. B. G. 2, 5:

    in herboso Apidano,

    on the banks of, Prop. 1, 3, 6:

    in digitis,

    on tiptoe, Val. Fl. 4, 267:

    castra in limite locat,

    on the rampart, Tac. A. 1, 50:

    ipse coronam habebat unam in capite, alteram in collo,

    on, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27:

    oleae in arbore,

    Cels. 2, 24:

    Caesaris in barbaris erat nomen obscurius,

    among, Caes. B. C. 1, 61:

    in ceteris nationibus, Cels. praef. 1: qui in Brutiis praeerat,

    Liv. 25, 16, 7:

    in juvenibus,

    Quint. 11, 1, 32:

    nutus in mutis pro sermone est,

    id. 11, 3, 66.—Of dress, like cum, q. v.:

    in veste candida,

    Liv. 45, 20, 5; 34, 7, 3:

    in calceis,

    id. 24, 38, 2:

    in insignibus,

    id. 5, 41, 2:

    in tunicis albis,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 27, 13:

    in Persico et vulgari habitu,

    Curt. 3, 3, 4:

    in lugubri veste,

    id. 10, 5, 17:

    in Tyriis,

    Ov. A. A. 2, 297:

    in Cois,

    id. ib. v. 298; cf.:

    homines in catenis Romam mittere,

    Liv. 29, 21, 12; 32, 1, 8: quis multa te in rosa urget, etc., Hor C. 1, 5, 1; so, in viola aut in rosa, Cic. Tusc. [p. 912] 5, 26, 73.—So of arms:

    duas legiones in armis,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 11, 6; cf. Verg. A. 3, 395:

    in armis hostis,

    under arms, Ov. M. 12,65:

    quae in ore atque in oculis provinciae gesta sunt (= coram),

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81; so,

    in oculis provinciae,

    id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 2:

    in oculis omnium,

    id. ib. 1, 3, 7:

    divitiae, decus, gloria in oculis sita sunt,

    Sall. C. 20, 14; Curt. 4, 13, 1; Liv. 22, 12, 6:

    Julianus in ore ejus (Vitellii) jugulatur,

    Tac. H. 3, 77; Sen. Ben. 7, 19, 7.—Of a passage in any writing (but when the author is named, by meton., for his works, apud is used, Krebs, Antibarb. p. 561):

    in populorum institutis aut legibus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 15, 42:

    in illis libris qui sunt de natura deorum,

    id. Fat. 1, 1:

    in Timaeo dicit,

    id. N. D. 1, 12, 30:

    epistula, in qua omnia perscripta erant,

    Nep. Pelop. 3, 2:

    perscribit in litteris, hostes ab se discessisse,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 49; but in is also used with an author's name when, not a place in his book, but a feature of his style, etc., is referred to:

    in Thucydide orbem modo orationis desidero,

    Cic. Or. 71, 234:

    in Herodoto omnia leniter fluunt,

    Quint. 9, 4, 18.—Of books:

    libri oratorii diu in manibus fuerunt,

    Cic. Att. 4, 13, 2; id. Lael. 25, 96; but more freq. trop.: in manibus habere, tenere, etc., to be engaged, occupied with, to have under control or within reach:

    philosophi quamcunque rem habent in manibus,

    id. Tusc. 5, 7, 18:

    quam spem nunc habeat in manibus, exponam,

    id. Verr. 1, 6, 16:

    rem habere in manibus,

    id. Att. 6, 3, 1; cf.:

    neque mihi in manu fuit Jugurtha qualis foret,

    in my power, Sall. J. 14, 4:

    postquam nihil esse in manu sua respondebatur,

    Liv. 32, 24, 2:

    quod ipsorum in manu sit,... bellum an pacem malint,

    Tac. A. 2, 46; but, cum tantum belli in manibus esset, was in hand, busied (cf.:

    inter manus),

    Liv. 4, 57, 1; so,

    quorum epistulas in manu teneo,

    Cic. Phil. 12, 4, 9; cf. id. Att. 2, 2, 2:

    in manu poculum tenens,

    id. Tusc. 1, 29, 71:

    coronati et lauream in manu tenentes,

    Liv. 40, 37, 3; Suet. Claud. 15 fin. —Of that which is thought of as existing in the mind, memory, character, etc.:

    in animo esse,

    Cic. Fam. 14, 11:

    in animo habere,

    id. Rosc. Am. 18, 52:

    lex est ratio insita in natura,

    id. Leg. 1, 6, 18:

    in memoria sedere,

    id. de Or. 2, 28, 122; cf.:

    tacito mutos volvunt in pectore questus,

    Luc. 1, 247:

    quanta auctoritas fuit in C. Metello!

    Cic. de Sen. 17, 61. —So freq. of a person's qualities of mind or character:

    erat in eo summa eloquentia, summa fides,

    Cic. Mur. 28, 58; cf.:

    in omni animante est summum aliquid atque optimum, ut in equis,

    id. Fin. 4, 41, 37:

    si quid artis in medicis est,

    Curt. 3, 5, 13; cf.:

    nibil esse in morte timendum,

    Lucr. 3, 866.— Esp., in eo loco, in that state or condition:

    in eo enim loco res sunt nostrae, ut, etc.,

    Liv. 7, 35, 7: si vos in eo loco essetis, quid aliud fecissetis? Cat. ap. Quint. 9, 2, 21; so,

    quo in loco, etc.: cum ex equitum et calonum fuga, quo in loco res essent, cognovissent,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 26:

    videtis, quo in loco res haec siet, Ter Phorm. 2, 4, 6: quod ipse, si in eodem loco esset, facturus fuerit,

    Liv. 37, 14, 5.—Hence, without loco, in eo esse ut, etc., to be in such a condition, etc.:

    non in eo esse Carthaginiensium res, ut Galliam armis obtineant,

    Liv. 30, 19, 3:

    cum res non in eo esset, ut Cyprum tentaret,

    id. 33, 41, 9; 8, 27, 3; 2, 17, 5; Nep. Mil. 7, 3; id. Paus. 5, 1 (cf. I. C. 1. infra).—
    B.
    In time, indicating its duration, in, during, in the course of:

    feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia,

    in my youth, when I was young, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 6:

    in tempore hoc,

    Ter. And. 4, 5, 24:

    in hoc tempore,

    Tac. A. 13, 47:

    in tali tempore,

    Sall. C. 48, 5; Liv. 22, 35; 24, 28 al.:

    in diebus paucis,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 77:

    in brevi spatio,

    id. Heaut. 5, 2, 2; Suet. Vesp. 4:

    in qua aetate,

    Cic. Brut. 43 fin.:

    in ea aetate,

    Liv. 1, 57:

    in omni aetate,

    Cic. de Sen. 3, 9:

    in aetate, qua jam Alexander orbem terrarum subegisset,

    Suet. Caes. 7:

    qua (sc. Iphigenia) nihil erat in eo quidem anno natum pulchrius,

    in the course of, during the year, Cic. Off. 3, 25, 95 (al. eo quidem anno):

    nihil in vita se simile fecisse,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 91: nihil in vita vidit calamitatis A. Cluentius. id. Clu. 6, 18:

    in tota vita inconstans,

    id. Tusc. 4, 13, 29.—
    b.
    In tempore, at the right or proper time, in time (Cic. uses only tempore; v. tempus): eccum ipsum video in tempore huc se recipere, Ter. Phorm. 2, 4, 24:

    ni pedites equitesque in tempore subvenissent,

    Liv. 33, 5:

    spreta in tempore gloria interdum cumulatior redit,

    id. 2, 47:

    rebellaturi,

    Tac. A. 12, 50:

    atque adeo in ipso tempore eccum ipsum obviam,

    Ter. And. 3, 2, 52: in tempore, opportune. Nos sine praepositione dicimus tempore et tempori, Don. ad Ter. And. 4, 4, 19.—
    c.
    In praesentia and in praesenti, at present, now, at this moment, under these circumstances:

    sic enim mihi in praesentia occurrit,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 8, 14:

    vestrae quidem cenae non solum in praesentia, sed etiam postero die jucundae sunt,

    id. ib. 5, 35, 100:

    id quod unum maxime in praesentia desiderabatur,

    Liv. 21, 37:

    haec ad te in praesenti scripsi, ut, etc.,

    for the present, Cic. Fam. 2, 10, 4.—
    d.
    With gerunds and fut. pass. participles, to indicate duration of time, in:

    fit, ut distrahatur in deliberando animus,

    Cic. Off. 1, 3, 9; id. Fam. 2, 6, 2:

    vitiosum esse in dividendo partem in genere numerare,

    id. Fin. 2, 9, 26:

    quod in litteris dandis praeter consuetudinem proxima nocte vigilarat,

    id. Cat. 3, 3, 6:

    ne in quaerendis suis pugnandi tempus dimitteret,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 21:

    in agris vastandis incendiisque faciendis hostibus,

    in laying waste, id. ib. 5, 19:

    in excidenda Numantia,

    Cic. Off. 1, 22, 76:

    cum in immolanda Iphigenia tristis Calchas esset,

    id. Or. 21, 74.—
    C.
    In other relations, where a person or thing is thought of as in a certain condition, situation, or relation, in:

    qui magno in aere alieno majores etiam possessiones habent,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 8, 18:

    se in insperatis repentinisque pecuniis jactare,

    id. Cat. 2, 9, 20:

    Larinum in summo timore omnium cum armatis advolavit,

    id. Clu. 8, 25.—

    So freq., of qualities or states of mind: summa in sollicitudine ac timore Parthici belli,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 31:

    torpescentne dextrae in amentia illa?

    Liv. 23, 9, 7:

    hunc diem perpetuum in laetitia degere,

    Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 5; Cic. Cat. 4, 1, 2:

    in metu,

    Tac. A. 14, 43:

    in voluptate,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 19, 62:

    alicui in amore esse,

    beloved, id. Verr. 2, 4, 1, § 3:

    alicui in amoribus esse,

    id. Att. 6, 1, 12:

    res in invidia erat,

    Sall. J. 25, 5; Liv. 29, 37, 17: sum in expectatione omnium rerum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 4, 10:

    num... Diogenem Stoicum coegit in suis studiis obmutescere senectus?

    in his studies, Cic. de Sen. 7, 21:

    mirificam cepi voluptatem ex tua diligentia: quod in summis tuis occupationibus mihi tamen rei publicae statum per te notum esse voluisti,

    even in, notwithstanding your great occupations, id. Fam. 3, 11, 4.—

    So freq., of business, employment, occupations, etc.: in aliqua re versari,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 47, § 105:

    similia iis, quae in consilio dixerat,

    Curt. 5, 5, 23:

    in certamine armorum atque in omni palaestra quid satis recte cavetur,

    Quint. 9, 4, 8:

    agi in judiciis,

    id. 11, 1, 78:

    tum vos mihi essetis in consilio,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 18, 28:

    in actione... dicere,

    Quint. 8, 2, 2.—Of an office, magistracy:

    in quo tum magistratu forte Brutus erat,

    Liv. 1, 59, 7; 4, 17, 1:

    in eo magistratu pari diligentia se praebuit,

    Nep. Han. 7, 5 (cf. B. 1. supra):

    in ea ipsa causa fuit eloquentissimus,

    Cic. Brut, 43, 160:

    qui non defendit nec obsistit, si potest, injuriae, tam est in vitio, quam, etc.,

    is in the wrong, acts wrongly, id. Off. 1, 7, 23:

    etsi hoc quidem est in vitio, dissolutionem naturae tam valde perhorrescere,

    is wrong, id. Fin. 5, 11, 31:

    non sunt in eo genere tantae commoditates corporis,

    id. ib. 4, 12, 29; cf.:

    an omnino nulla sit in eo genere distinctio,

    id. Or. 61, 205:

    Drusus erat de praevaricatione absolutus in summa quatuor sententiis,

    on the whole, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 16; cf.:

    et in omni summa, ut mones, valde me ad otium pacemque converto,

    id. ib. 3, 5, 5;

    but, in summa, sic maxime judex credit, etc.,

    in a word, in fine, Quint. 9, 2, 72; Auct. B. Alex. 71; Just. 37, 1, 8:

    horum (juvenum) inductio in parte simulacrum decurrentis exercitus erat: ex parte elegantioris exercitii quam militaris artis,

    in part, Liv. 44, 9, 5; cf.:

    quod mihi in parte verum videtur,

    Quint. 2, 8, 6:

    patronorum in parte expeditior, in parte difficilior interrogatio est,

    id. 5, 7, 22:

    hoc facere in eo homine consueverunt,

    in the case of, Caes. B. G. 7, 21:

    in furibus aerarii,

    Sall. C. 52, 12:

    Achilles talis in hoste fuit,

    Verg. A. 2, 540:

    in hoc homine saepe a me quaeris, etc.,

    in the case of, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 3, § 6: in nominibus impiis, Sall. C. 51, 15:

    suspectus et in morte matris fuit,

    Suet. Vit. 14:

    qui praesentes metuunt, in absentia hostes erunt, = absentes,

    Curt. 6, 3, 8 (cf. I. B. c. supra).—Of the meaning of words, etc.:

    non solum in eodem sensu, sed etiam in diverso, eadem verba contra,

    Quint. 9, 3, 36:

    aliter voces aut eaedem in diversa significatione ponuntur,

    id. 9, 3, 69:

    Sallustius in significatione ista non superesse sed superare dicit,

    Gell. 1, 22, 15:

    stips non dicitur in significatione trunci,

    Charis. 1, 18, 39:

    semper in significatione ea hortus,

    Plin. 19, 4, 19, § 50. —
    2.
    In with abl. of adjj. is used with the verbs esse and habere to express quality:

    cum exitus haud in facili essent, i. e. haud faciles,

    Liv. 3, 8, 9:

    adeo moderatio tuendae libertatis in difficili est,

    id. 3, 8, 11; 3, 65, 11; but mostly with adjj. of the first and second declension:

    in obscuro esse, Liv. praef. § 3: in dubio esse,

    id. 2, 3, 1; 3, 19, 8; Ov. H. 19, 174:

    dum in dubiost animus,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 31; 2, 2, 10:

    in integro esse,

    Cic. Fam. 15, 16, 3; id. Att. 11, 15, 4:

    in incerto esse,

    Liv. 5, 28, 5:

    in obvio esse,

    id. 37, 23, 1:

    in tuto esse,

    id. 38, 4, 10; cf.:

    videre te in tuto,

    Cat. 30, 6:

    in aequo esse,

    Liv. 39, 37, 14; Tac. A. 2, 44:

    in expedito esse,

    Curt. 4, 2, 22:

    in proximo esse,

    Quint. 1, 3, 4:

    in aperto esse,

    Sall. C. 5, 3:

    in promisco esse,

    Liv. 7, 17, 7:

    in augusto esse,

    Cels. 5, 27, 2:

    in incerto haberi,

    Sall. J. 46, 8; Tac. A. 15, 17:

    in levi habitum,

    id. H. 2, 21; cf.:

    in incerto relinquere,

    Liv. 5, 28, 5; Tac. H. 2, 83.
    II.
    With acc.
    A.
    In space, with verbs of motion, into or to a place or thing (rarely with names of towns and small islands;

    v. Zumpt, Gram. § 398): influxit non tenuis quidam e Graecia rivulus in hanc urbem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 19:

    in Ephesum advenit,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 1, 35:

    in Epirum venire,

    Cic. Att. 13, 25, 3:

    ibo in Piraeeum, visamque, ecquae advenerit in portum ex Epheso navis mercatoria,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 2: venio ad Piraeea, in quo magis reprehendendus sum, quod... Piraeea scripserim, non Piraeeum, quam in quod addiderim;

    non enim hoc ut oppido praeposui, sed ut loco,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 10:

    se contulisse Tarquinios, in urbem Etruriae florentissimam,

    id. Rep. 2, 19:

    remigrare in domum veterem e nova,

    id. Ac. 1, 4, 13:

    cum in sua rura venerunt,

    id. Tusc. 5, 35, 102:

    a te ipso missi in ultimas gentes,

    id. Fam. 15, 9:

    in Ubios legatos mittere,

    Caes. B. G. 4, 11:

    dein Thalam pervenit, in oppidum magnum et opulentum,

    Sall. J. 75, 1:

    Regillum antiquam in patriam se contulerat,

    Liv. 3, 58, 1:

    abire in exercitum,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 102.— With nuntio:

    cum id Zmyrnam in contionem nuntiatum est,

    Tac. A. 4, 56:

    nuntiatur in castra,

    Lact. Most. Pers. 46; cf.:

    allatis in castra nuntiis,

    Tac. H. 4, 32: in manus sumere, tradere, etc., into one's hands:

    iste unumquodque vas in manus sumere,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 27, § 63:

    Falerios se in manus Romanis tradidisse,

    Liv. 5, 27, 3.—Rarely with the verbs ponere, collocare, etc. (pregn., i. e. to bring into... and place there):

    in crimen populo ponere,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 10:

    ut liberos, uxores suaque omnia in silvas deponerent,

    Caes. B. G. 4, 19:

    duplam pecuniam in thesauros reponi,

    Liv. 29, 19, 7:

    prius me collocavi in arborem,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 8, 6:

    sororem et propinquas suas nuptum in alias civitates collocasse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18.— Motion in any direction, up to, to, into, down to:

    in caelum ascendere,

    Cic. Lael. 23 fin.:

    filium ipse paene in umeros suos extulisset,

    id. de Or. 1, 53, 228:

    tamquam in aram confugitis ad deum,

    up to the altar, id. Tusc. 3, 10, 25:

    Saturno tenebrosa in Tartara misso,

    Ov. M. 1, 113:

    in flumen deicere,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Nep. Chab. 4, 3.—
    2.
    Denoting mere direction towards a place or thing, and hence sometimes joined with versus, towards:

    quid nunc supina sursum in caelum conspicis,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 78:

    si in latus aut dextrum aut sinistrum, ut ipsi in usu est, cubat,

    Cels. 2, 3:

    Belgae spectant in septentriones et orientem solem,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1:

    in orientem Germaniae, in occidentem Hispaniae obtenditur, Gallis in meridiem etiam inspicitur,

    Tac. Agr. 10:

    in laevum prona nixus sedet Inachus urna,

    Stat. Th. 2, 218.—With versus:

    castra ex Biturigibus movet in Arvernos versus,

    towards, Caes. B. G. 7, 8 fin.:

    in Galliam versus movere,

    Sall. C. 56, 4: in [p. 913] ltaliam versus, Front. Strat. 1, 4, 11:

    si in urbem versus venturi erant,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 82. —
    3.
    So of that which is thought of as entering into the mind, memory, etc. (cf. I. A. 2. fin.):

    in memoriam reducere,

    Cic. Inv 1, 52, 98:

    in animum inducere,

    Liv. 27, 9:

    in mentem venire,

    Cic. Fam. 7, 3:

    frequens imitatio transit in mores,

    Quint. 1, 11, 3. —

    Or into a writing or speech: in illam Metellinam orationem addidi quaedam,

    Cic. Att. 1, 13, 5.—
    B.
    In time, into, till, for:

    dormiet in lucem,

    into the daylight, till broad day, Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 34:

    statim e somno, quem plerumque in diem extrahunt, lavantur,

    Tac. G. 22: sermonem in multam noctem produximus, deep into the night, Cic. Rep. Fragm. ap. Arus. Mess. p. 239 Lindem.:

    in multam noctem luxit,

    Suet. Tib. 74:

    si febris in noctem augetur,

    Cels. 7, 27:

    dixit in noctem atque etiam nocte illatis lucernis,

    Plin. Ep. 4, 9, 14:

    indutias in triginta annos impetraverunt,

    for thirty years, Liv. 9, 37, 12; 7, 20, 8:

    nisi id verbum in omne tempus perdidissem,

    forever, Cic. Fam. 5, 15, 1:

    ad cenam hominem in hortos invitavit in posterum diem,

    for the following day, id. Off. 3, 14, 58:

    audistis auctionem constitutam in mensem Januarium,

    id. Agr. 1, 2, 4:

    subito reliquit annum suum seque in annum proximum transtulit,

    id. Mil. 9, 24:

    solis defectiones itemque lunae praedicuntur in multos annos,

    for many years, id. Div. 2, 6, 17:

    postero die Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie,

    Liv. 27, 2:

    qui ab matutino tempore duraverunt in occasum,

    Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99:

    seritur (semen lini) a Kalendis Octobribus in ortum aquilae,

    Col. 2, 10, 17.—With usque:

    neque illi didicerunt haec usque in senectutem,

    Quint. 12, 11, 20:

    in illum usque diem servati,

    id. 8, 3, 68:

    in serum usque patente cubiculo,

    Suet. Oth. 11:

    regnum trahat usque in tempora fati,

    Sil. 11, 392: in posterum (posteritatem) or in futurum, in future, for the future: in praesens, for the present: in perpetuum or in aeternum, forever:

    sancit in posterum, ne quis, etc.,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 5, 10:

    res dilata est in posterum,

    id. Fam. 10, 12, 3:

    video quanta tempestas invidiae nobis, si minus in praesens, at in posteritatem impendeat,

    id. Cat. 1, 9, 22:

    id aegre et in praesentia hi passi et in futurum etiam metum ceperunt,

    Liv. 34, 27, 10; cf.:

    ingenti omnium et in praesens laetitia et in futurum spe,

    id. 30, 17, 1:

    effugis in futurum,

    Tac. H. 1, 71:

    quod eum tibi quaestoris in loco constitueras, idcirco tibi amicum in perpetuum fore putasti?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 30; cf.:

    oppidum omni periculo in perpetuum liberavit,

    id. Fam. 13, 4, 2:

    quae (leges) non in tempus aliquod, sed perpetuae utilitatis causa in aeternum latae sunt,

    Liv. 34, 6, 4: in tempus, for a while, for a short time, for the occasion (postAug.):

    sensit miles in tempus conficta,

    Tac. A. 1, 37:

    ne urbs sine imperio esset, in tempus deligebatur, qui jus redderet,

    id. ib. 6, 11:

    scaena in tempus structa,

    id. ib. 14, 20. —So in diem, for the day, to meet the day's want:

    nihil ex raptis in diem commeatibus superabat,

    Liv. 22, 40, 8:

    rapto in diem frumento,

    id. 4, 10, 1;

    but, cum illa fundum emisset in diem,

    i. e. a fixed day of payment, Nep. Att. 9, 5: in singulos dies, or simply in dies, with comparatives and verbs denoting increase, from day to day, daily:

    vitium in dies crescit,

    Vell. 2, 5, 2:

    in dies singulos breviores litteras ad te mitto,

    Cic. Att. 5, 7:

    qui senescat in dies,

    Liv. 22, 39, 15: in diem, daily:

    nos in diem vivimus,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 11, 33:

    in diem et horam,

    Hor. S. 2, 6, 47;

    and in horas,

    hourly, id. C. 2, 13, 14; id. S. 2, 7, 10.—
    C.
    In other relations, in which an aiming at, an inclining or striving towards a thing, is conceivable, on, about, respecting; towards, against; for, as; in, to; into:

    id, quod apud Platonem est in philosophos dictum,

    about the philosophers, Cic. Off. 1, 9, 28:

    Callimachi epigramma in Ambraciotam Cleombrotum est,

    id. Tusc. 1, 34, 84; cf.:

    cum cenaret Simonides apud Scopam cecinissetque id car men, quod in eum scripsisset, etc.,

    id. de Or. 2, 86, 352:

    quo amore tandem inflammati esse debemus in ejus modi patriam,

    towards, id. ib. 1, 44, 196:

    in liberos nostros indulgentia,

    id. ib. 2, 40, 168:

    de suis meritis in rem publicam aggressus est dicere,

    id. Or. 38, 133: ita ad impietatem in deos, in homines adjunxit injuriam, against, id. N. D. 3, 34 fin.:

    in dominum quaeri,

    to be examined as a witness against, id. Mil. 22, 60:

    in eos impetum facere,

    id. Att. 2, 22, 1:

    invehi in Thebanos,

    Nep. Epam. 6, 1; id. Tim. 5, 3:

    quaecumque est hominis definitio, una in omnes valet,

    id. Leg. 1, 10, 29:

    num etiam in deos immortales inauspicatam legem valuisse?

    Liv. 7, 6, 11:

    vereor coram in os te laudare amplius,

    to your face, Ter. Ad. 2, 4, 5:

    si in me exerciturus (pugnos), quaeso, in parietem ut primum domes,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 168:

    in puppim rediere rates,

    Luc. 3, 545 Burm. (cf.:

    sic equi dicuntur in frena redire, pulsi in terga recedere, Sulp. ad loc.): Cumis eam vidi: venerat enim in funus: cui funeri ego quoque operam dedi,

    to the funeral, to take charge of the funeral, Cic. Att. 15, 1, B:

    se quisque eum optabat, quem fortuna in id certamen legeret,

    Liv. 21, 42, 2:

    quodsi in nullius mercedem negotia eant, pauciora fore,

    Tac. A. 11, 6:

    haec civitas mulieri redimiculum praebeat, haec in collum, haec in crines,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 33:

    Rhegium quondam in praesidium missa legio,

    Liv. 28, 28; so,

    datae in praesidium cohortes,

    Tac. H. 4, 35: hoc idem significat Graecus ille in eam sententiam versus, to this effect or purport, Cic. Div. 2, 10, 25; cf. id. Fam. 9, 15, 4:

    haec et in eam sententiam cum multa dixisset,

    id. Att. 2, 22:

    qui omnia sic exaequaverunt, ut in utramque partem ita paria redderent, uti nulla selectione uterentur,

    id. Fin. 3, 4, 12:

    in utramque partem disputat,

    on both sides, for and against, id. Off. 3, 23, 89: te rogo, me tibi in omnes partes defendendum putes, Vatin. ap. Cic. Fam. 5, 10 fin.:

    facillime et in optimam partem cognoscuntur adulescentes, qui se ad claros et sapientes viros contulerunt,

    id. Off. 2, 13, 46:

    cives Romani servilem in modum cruciati et necati,

    in the manner of slaves, Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 13; cf.:

    miserandum in modum milites populi Romani capti, necati sunt,

    id. Prov. Cons. 3, 5:

    senior quidam Veiens vaticinantis in modum cecinit,

    Liv. 5, 15, 4;

    also: domus et villae in urbium modum aedificatae,

    Sall. C. 12, 3:

    perinde ac si in hanc formulam omnia judicia legitima sint,

    Cic. Rosc. Com. 5, 15:

    judicium quin acciperet in ea ipsa verba quae Naevius edebat, non recusasse,

    id. Quint. 20, 63; cf.:

    senatusconsultum in haec verba factum,

    Liv. 30, 43, 9:

    pax data Philippo in has leges est,

    id. 33, 30:

    Gallia omnis divisa est in partes tres,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1; cf.:

    quae quidem in confirmationem et reprehensionem dividuntur,

    Cic. Part. Or. 9, 33: describebat censores binos in singulas civitates, i. e. for or over each state, id. Verr. 2, 2, 53; cf. id. ib. 2, 4, 26:

    itaque Titurium Tolosae quaternos denarios in singulas vini amphoras portorii nomine exegisse,

    id. Font. 5, 9:

    extulit eum plebs sextantibus collatis in capita,

    a head, for each person, Liv. 2, 33 fin.:

    Macedonibus treceni nummi in capita statutum est pretium,

    id. 32, 17, 2; cf.:

    Thracia in Rhoemetalcen filium... inque liberos Cotyis dividitur (i. e. inter),

    Tac. A. 2, 67.—
    2.
    Of the object or end in view, regarded also as the motive of action or effect:

    non te in me illiberalem, sed me in se neglegentem putabit,

    Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 16:

    neglegentior in patrem,

    Just. 32, 3, 1:

    in quem omnes intenderat curas,

    Curt. 3, 1, 21:

    quos ardere in proelia vidi,

    Verg. A. 2, 347:

    in bellum ardentes,

    Manil. 4, 220:

    nutante in fugam exercitu,

    Flor. 3, 10, 4:

    in hanc tam opimam mercedem agite ( = ut eam vobis paretis, Weissenb. ad loc.),

    Liv. 21, 43, 7:

    certa praemia, in quorum spem pugnarent,

    id. 21, 45, 4:

    in id sors dejecta,

    id. 21, 42, 2:

    in id fide accepta,

    id. 28, 17, 9:

    in spem pacis solutis animis,

    id. 6, 11, 5 et saep.:

    ingrata misero vita ducenda est in hoc, ut, etc.,

    Hor. Epod. 17, 63:

    nec in hoc adhibetur, ut, etc.,

    Sen. Ep. 16, 3:

    alius non in hoc, ut offenderet, facit, id. de Ira, 2, 26, 3: in quod tum missi?

    Just. 38, 3, 4.—So, like ad, with words expressing affections or inclination of the mind:

    in obsequium plus aequo pronus,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 10:

    paratus in res novas,

    Tac. H. 4, 32:

    in utrumque paratus,

    Verg. A. 2, 61.—
    3.
    Of the result of an act or effort:

    denique in familiae luctum atque in privignorum funus nupsit,

    Cic. Clu. 66, 188:

    paratusque miles, ut ordo agminis in aciem adsisteret,

    Tac. A. 2, 16: excisum Euboicae latus ingens rupis in antrum, Verg. A. 6, 42:

    portus ab Euroo fluctu curvatus in arcum,

    id. ib. 3, 533:

    populum in obsequia principum formavit,

    Just. 3, 2, 9:

    omnium partium decus in mercedem conruptum erat,

    Sall. H. 1, 13 Dietsch:

    commutari ex veris in falsa,

    Cic. Fat. 9, 17; 9, 18:

    in sollicitudinem versa fiducia est,

    Curt. 3, 8, 20.—
    4.
    Esp. in the phrase: in gratiam or in honorem, alicujus, in kindness, to show favor, out of good feeling, to show honor, etc., to any one (first in Liv.; cf. Weissenb. ad Liv. 28, 21, 4;

    Krebs, Antibarb. p. 562): in gratiam levium sociorum injuriam facere,

    Liv. 39, 26, 12:

    pugnaturi in gratiam ducis,

    id. 28, 21, 4:

    quorum in gratiam Saguntum deleverat Hannibal,

    id. 28, 39, 13; cf. id. 35, 2, 6; 26, 6, 16:

    oratio habita in sexus honorem,

    Quint. 1, 1, 6:

    convivium in honorem victoriae,

    id. 11, 2, 12:

    in honorem Quadratillae,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 7:

    in honorem tuum,

    Sen. Ep. 20, 7; 79, 2; 92, 1; Vell. 2, 41 al.—
    5.
    In the phrase, in rem esse, to be useful, to avail (cf.: e re esse;

    opp.: contra rem esse): ut aequom est, quod in rem esse utrique arbitremur,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 10:

    si in rem est Bacchidis,

    Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 27; 2, 2, 7:

    hortatur, imperat, quae in rem sunt,

    Liv. 26, 44, 7:

    cetera, quae cognosse in rem erat,

    id. 22, 3, 2; 44, 19, 3:

    in rem fore credens universos adpellare,

    Sall. C. 20, 1; cf.:

    in duas res magnas id usui fore,

    Liv. 37, 15, 7:

    in hos usus,

    Verg. A. 4, 647.—
    6.
    To form adverbial expressions:

    non nominatim, qui Capuae, sed in universum qui usquam coissent, etc.,

    in general, Liv. 9, 26, 8; cf.:

    terra etsi aliquanto specie differt, in universum tamen aut silvis horrida aut paludibus foeda,

    Tac. G. 5:

    in universum aestimanti, etc.,

    id. ib. 6:

    aestate in totum, si fieri potest, abstinendum est (Venere),

    wholly, entirely, Cels. 1, 3 fin.; cf. Col. 2, 1, 2:

    in plenum dici potest, etc.,

    fully, Plin. 16, 40, 79, § 217:

    Marii virtutem in majus celebrare,

    beyond due bounds, Sall. J. 73, 5:

    aliter se corpus habere atque consuevit, neque in pejus tantum, sed etiam in melius,

    for the worse, for the better, Cels. 2, 2:

    in deterius,

    Tac. A. 14, 43:

    in mollius,

    id. ib. 14, 39:

    quid enim est iracundia in supervacuum tumultuante frigidius? Sen. de Ira, 2, 11: civitas saepta muris neque in barbarum corrupta (v. barbarus),

    Tac. A. 6, 42; cf.:

    aucto in barbarum cognomento,

    id. H. 5, 2:

    priusquam id sors cerneret, in incertum, ne quid gratia momenti faceret, in utramque provinciam decerni,

    while the matter was uncertain, Liv. 43, 12, 2:

    nec puer Iliaca quisquam de gente Latinos In tantum spe tollet avos,

    so much, Verg. A. 6, 876:

    in tantum suam felicitatem virtutemque enituisse,

    Liv. 22, 27, 4; cf.:

    quaedam (aquae) fervent in tantum, ut non possint esse usui,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 24:

    viri in tantum boni, in quantum humana simplicitas intellegi potest,

    Vell. 2, 43, 4:

    quippe pedum digitos, in quantum quaeque secuta est, Traxit,

    Ov. M. 11, 71:

    meliore in omnia ingenio animoque quam fortuna usus,

    in all respects, Vell. 2, 13:

    ut simul in omnia paremur,

    Quint. 11, 3, 25:

    in antecessum dare,

    beforehand, Sen. Ep. 118.—
    7.
    Sometimes with esse, habere, etc., in is followed by the acc. (constr. pregn.), to indicate a direction, aim, purpose, etc. (but v. Madvig. Gram. § 230, obs. 2, note, who regards these accusatives as originating in errors of pronunciation); so, esse in potestatem alicujus, to come into and remain in one ' s power: esse in mentem alicui, to come into and be in one ' s mind: esse in conspectum, to appear to and be in sight: esse in usum, to come into use, be used, etc.:

    quod, qui illam partem urbis tenerent, in eorum potestatem portum futurum intellegebant,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 38:

    ut portus in potestatem Locrensium esset,

    Liv. 24, 1, 13; 2, 14, 4:

    eam optimam rem publicam esse duco, quae sit in potestatem optimorum,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 17:

    neque enim sunt motus in nostram potestatem,

    Quint. 6, 2, 29:

    numero mihi in mentem fuit,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 25; cf.:

    ecquid in mentem est tibi?

    id. Bacch. 1, 2, 53:

    nec prius surrexisse ac militibus in conspectum fuisse, quam, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 16:

    quod satis in usum fuit, sublato, ceterum omne incensum est,

    Liv. 22, 20, 6: ab hospitibus clientibusque suis, ab exteris nationibus, quae in amicitiam populi Romani dicionemque essent, injurias propulsare, Cic. Div. ap. Caecil. 20, 66: adesse in senatum [p. 914] jussit a. d. XIII. Kal. Octobr., id. Phil. 5, 7, 19.—Less freq. with habere: facito in memoriam habeas tuam majorem filiam mihi te despondisse, call or bring to mind, Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 108:

    M. Minucium magistrum equitum, ne quid rei bellicae gereret, prope in custodiam habitum,

    put in prison, kept in prison, Liv. 22, 25, 6:

    reliquos in custodiam habitos,

    Tac. H. 1, 87.—So rarely with other verbs:

    pollicetur se provinciam Galliam retenturum in senatus populique Romani potestatem,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 4, 8. —
    III.
    In composition, n regularly becomes assimilated to a foll. l, m, or r, and is changed before the labials into m: illabor, immitto, irrumpo, imbibo, impello.—As to its meaning, according as it is connected with a verb of rest or motion, it conveys the idea of existence in a place or thing, or of motion, direction, or inclination into or to a place or thing: inesse; inhibere, inferre, impellere, etc. See Hand, Turs. III. pp. 243- 356.
    2.
    in (before b and p, im; before l, m, and r, the n assimilates itself to these consonants), an inseparable particle [kindred with Sanscr. a-, an-; Gr. a-, an; Goth. and Germ. un-], which negatives the meaning of the noun or participle with which it is connected; Engl. un-, in-, not: impar, unequal: intolerabilis, unbearable, intolerable: immitis, not mild, rude, etc.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > in

  • 9 ἐμποιέω

    2 put in, ἐ. ἴχνεσιν ἴχνη, i.e. put their feet in the same tracks, X.Cyn.5.20.
    3 foist in,

    ἐς τὰ Μουσαίου ἐ. Χρησμόν Hdt.7.6

    ;

    Χρησμοὶ ἐμπεποιημένοι τοῖς Σιβυλλείοις D.H.4.62

    ; simply, insert, opp. ἐξαγρέω, Schwyzer 412.3 ([place name] Elis).
    II produce or create in,

    ἡ Χρεία καπήλων.. γένεσιν ἐ. τῇ πόλει Pl.R. 371d

    ; οἱ Χρηματισταὶ.. πολὺν τὸν κηφῆνα καὶ πτωχὸν ἐ. τῇ πόλει ib. 556a, etc.; δύναμιν (sc. τῇ πόλει) Isoc.9.47.
    2 of states of mind,

    ἐπιθυμίαν ἐ. τοῖς Ἀθηναίων ξυμμάχοις ἐς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους Th.4.81

    ;

    κακόν τι ἐ. ταῖς ψυχαῖς Pl.Phd. 115e

    ; ἐν αὐτῷ δειλίαν ἐ. Id.R. 590b;

    ἐλπίδας ἐ. ἀνθρώποις X.Cyr.1.6.19

    ;

    ψυχῇ ἐπιστήμην Id.Mem. 2.1.20

    ;

    ταραχήν τισι Men.Sam.9

    : without a dat., produce, create, μῖσος, λήθην, Pl.R. 351d, Phlb. 63e, D.19.3;

    ἡδονήν Arist.EN 1126a22

    ; Χρόνους [ ψηφίς μασι] D.23.93;

    Χαράν X.Hier.8.4

    ; ὀργὰς καὶ λύπας ib. 1.28: c. inf. pro acc., ἐ. τινὶ ἀκολουθητέον εἶναι produce in one's mind the persuasion that he must follow, Id.Oec.21.7; folld.by ὡς .., Id.An. 2.6.8.
    3 of conditions, produce, cause, ὀδύνην, σηπεδόνας, Hp. Acut.16, Aret.SD1.9;

    φθόρον Th.2.51

    ;

    στάσεις Id.1.2

    ; πολέμους καὶ στάσεις ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἐ. Isoc.4.168;

    Χρόνου διατριβὴν ἐ. Th.3.38

    ;

    κίνησιν Arist.Ph. 250b26

    .
    III [voice] Med., ἐμποιεῖσθαι, = ἀντιποιεῖσθαι, lay claim to,

    ἱερωσύνης LXX 1 Es.5.38

    , cf. AJA16.13 (Sardes, iv/iii B.C.), BGU13.13 (iii A.D.), etc.;

    τοῦ λαοῦ μου LXXEx.9.17

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐμποιέω

  • 10 acer

    1.
    ăcer, ĕris, n. [kindred with Germ. Ahorn] (f. Serv. ap. Prisc. p. 698 P.), the maple-tree, Plin. 16, 15, 26, § 66 sq.—
    II.
    Transf., the wood of the maple-tree, maplewood, used, on account of its hardness and firmness, for writing-tablets, Plin. 33, 11, 52, § 146; Ov. Am. 1, 11, 28.
    2.
    ācer, cris, cre, adj. (m. acris, Enn.; f. acer, Naev. and Enn.; acrus, a um, Pall.; Veg.; cf. Charis. 63 and 93 P.) [cf. akis, akôn, akmê, akros, ôkus, oxus; Sanscr. acan = dart, acus = swift; Germ. Ecke; Engl. edge, to egg; and with change of quantity, ăcus, acuo, ăceo, ăcies, ăcerbus], sharp, pointed, piercing, and the like.
    I.
    Prop., of the senses and things affecting them, sharp, dazzling, stinging, pungent, fine, piercing:

    praestans valetudine, viribus, formā, acerrimis integerrimisque sensibus,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 15, 45. So,
    a.
    Of the sight:

    acerrimus sensus videndi,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 87, 357:

    acres oculi,

    id. Planc. 27:

    splendor,

    Lucr. 4, 304:

    quidam colores ruboris acerrimi,

    Sen. Q. N. 1, 14 al. —
    b.
    Of the hearing:

    voce increpet acri?

    Lucr. 3, 953:

    aurium mensura, quod est acrius judicium et certius,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 47:

    acrem flammae sonitum,

    Verg. G. 4, 409:

    acri tibiā,

    Hor. C. 1, 12, 1.—
    c.
    Of smell, Lucr. 4, 122:

    exstinctum lumen acri nidore offendit nares,

    id. 6, 792; cf. ib. 1216:

    unguentis minus diu delectemur summa et acerrima suavitate conditis, quam his moderatis,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 25, 99:

    odor,

    Plin. 12, 17, 40.—
    d.
    Of taste: ut vitet acria, ut est sinapi, cepa, allium, Var. ap. Non. 201, 13:

    acres humores,

    sharp juices, Cic. N. D. 2, 23:

    lactuca innatat acri stomacho,

    an acid stomach, Hor. S. 2, 4, 59; cf. ib. 2, 8, 7:

    dulcibus cibis acres acutosque miscere,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 3 al. —
    e.
    Of sensation in its widest extent: aestatem auctumnus sequitur, post acer hiems fit, sharp, severe, Enn. ap. Prisc. p. 647 P. (Ann. v. 406 ed. Vahl.—cf. Lucr. 3, 20; 4, 261); and so Hor.: solvitur acris hiems, C. 1. 4, 1. —
    B.
    Of the internal states of the human system, violent, sharp, severe, gnawing:

    fames, Naev. ap. Prisc. l. l. (B. Punic. p. 18 ed. Vahl.): somnus, Enn. ap. Prisc. l. l. (Ann. v. 369): morbus,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 2, 119:

    dolor,

    Lucr. 6, 650:

    sitis,

    Tib. 1, 3, 77 al.
    II.
    Of the states of mind: violent, vehement, passionate, consuming: mors amici subigit, quae mihi est senium multo acerrimum, Att. ap. Non. 2, 22:

    acri ira percitus,

    Lucr. 5, 400: cf. 3, 312;

    6, 754 (on the contrary, 5, 1194: iras acerbas): acres curae,

    Lucr. 3, 463, and Var. ap. Non. 241:

    luctus,

    ib. 87:

    dolor,

    Verg. A. 7, 291:

    metus,

    Lucr. 6, 1211; Verg. A. 1, 362:

    amor,

    Tib. 2, 6, 15:

    acrior ad Venerem cupido,

    Curt. 6, 5 al. (Among unpleasant sensations, acer designates a piercing, wounding by sharpness; but acerbus the rough, harsh, repugnant, repulsive.)—
    B.
    Applied to the intellectual qualities, subtle, acute, penetrating, sagacious, shrewd:

    acrem irritat virtutem animi,

    Lucr. 1, 70:

    acri judicio perpende,

    id. 2, 1041:

    memoria,

    strong, retentive, Cic. de Or. 2, 87:

    vir acri ingenio,

    id. Or. 5; cf. id. Sest. 20 al. —
    C.
    Applied to moral qualities.
    1.
    In a good sense, active, ardent, eager, spirited, brave, zealous:

    milites,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 10:

    civis acerrimus,

    an ardent patriot, id. Fam. 10, 28:

    defensor,

    id. ib. 1, 1:

    studio acriore esse,

    id. de Or. 1, 21:

    jam tum acer curas venientem extendit in annum rusticus,

    Verg. G. 2, 405 al. —
    2.
    In a bad sense, violent, hasty, hot, passionate, fierce, severe (very freq.):

    uxor acerrima,

    enraged, angry, Plaut. Merc. 4, 4, 56; Ter. Ph. 2, 1, 32:

    dominos acres,

    Lucr. 6, 63; Nep. Tim. 3, 5; cf. Bremi Nep. Eum. 11, 1. Also, of animals, Lucr. 4, 421; 5, 860; Verg. A. 4, 156; Hor. Epod. 12, 6; 2, 31; Nep. Eum. 11, 1. —
    D.
    Of abstract things (mostly poet.), Ter. Ph. 2, 2, 32:

    egestas,

    Lucr. 3, 65:

    poenas,

    id. 6, 72:

    impetus,

    ib. 128; 392:

    acerrimum bellum,

    Cic. Balb. 6:

    nox acerrima atque acerbissima,

    id. Sull. 18:

    acrius supplicium,

    id. Cat. 1, 1; in Quint.: acres syllabae, which proceed from short to long, 9, 4.—Acer is constr. with abl., and also (esp. in the histt. of the silv. age) with gen., Vell. 1, 13; Tac. H. 2, 5 al.; cf. Ramsh. § 107, 6 note. With in, Cic. Fam. 8, 15; with inf., Sil. 3, 338.— Adv.: ācrĭter, sharply, strongly, vehemently, eagerly, zealously, etc., in all the signif. of the adj., Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 110; id. Ps. 1, 3, 39; Lucr. 6, 783; Cic. Tusc. 1, 30 al.— Comp., Lucr. 3, 54; 5, 1147; Hor. S. 2, 3, 92; Tac. A. 6, 45; 13, 3.— Sup., Cic. Fl. 11; id. Fam. 10, 28; 15, 4.—Also, ācre, Sall. Fragm. ap. Non. p. 132, 25; App. M. 10, 32; and perh. Pers. 4, 34.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > acer

  • 11 Music

       The serious composer who thinks about his art will sooner or later have occasion to ask himself: why is it so important to my own psyche that I compose music? What makes it seem so absolutely necessary, so that every other daily activity, by comparison, is of lesser significance? And why is the creative impulse never satisfied; why must one always begin anew? To the first question-the need to create-the answer is always the same-self-expression; the basic need to make evident one's deepest feelings about life. But why is the job never done? Why must one always begin again? The reason for the compulsion to renewed creativity, it seems to me, is that each added work brings with it an element of selfdiscovery. I must create in order to know myself, and since selfknowledge is a never-ending search, each new work is only a part-answer to the question "Who am I?" and brings with it the need to go on to other and different part-answers. (Copland, 1952, pp. 40-41)
       When collaboration occurs, when, for a while, the lines of conscious and unconscious thought run along the same track, we achieve the feeling of wholeness and satisfaction which is characteristic of our response to great art and other transcendent states of mind. The patterns of music, translated, analyzed, shorn of detail, are able to stimulate the patterns of emotions on many levels simultaneously, thus bringing various hierarchical states of consciousness and unconsciousness into harmony with one another during the existence of the music for us, whether this is in a performance or purely in the memory. As this happens we experience the sense of unity which arises from the cessation of conflict between conscious and unconscious. (McLaughlin, 1970, pp. 104-105)

    Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Music

  • 12 गन्धर्व


    gandharvá
    m. a Gandharva <though in later times the Gandharvas are regarded as a class, yet in RV. rarely more than one is mentioned;

    he is designated as the heavenly Gandharva ( divyág- RV. IX, 86, 36 and X, 139, 5),
    andﾠ is alsoﾠ called Viṡvā-vasu ( RV. X, 85, 21 and 22;139, 4 and 5) andﾠ Vāyu-keṡa (in pl. RV. III, 38, 6);
    his habitation is the sky, orﾠ the region of the air andﾠ the heavenly waters
    ( RV. I, 22, 14; VIII, 77, 5; IX, 85, 12; 86, 36; X, 10, 4 AV. II, 2, 3);
    his especial duty is to guard the heavenly Soma RV. IX, 83, 4 and 85, 12,
    which the gods obtain through his intervention RV. AV. VII, 73, 3 ; cf. RV. I, 22, 14 ;
    it is obtained for the human race by Indra, who conquers the Gandharva andﾠ takes it by force ( RV. VIII, 1, 11 and 77, 5);
    the heavenly Gandharva is supposed to be a good physician, because the Soma is considered as the best medicine;
    possibly, however, the word Soma originally denoted not the beverage so called, but the moon, andﾠ the heavenly Gandharva may have been the genius orﾠ tutelary deity of the moon;
    in one passage RV. IX, 86, 36 the heavenly Gandharva andﾠ the Soma are identified;
    he is alsoﾠ regarded as one of the genii who regulate the course of the Sun's horses
    i, 163, 2; X, 177, 2; cf. 135, 5 ;
    he knows andﾠ makes known the secrets of heaven andﾠ divine truths generally
    ( X, 139, 5 and 6 AV. II, 1, 2; XX, 128, 3 VS. XI, 1; XXXII, 9);
    he is the parent of the first pair of human beings, Yama andﾠ Yamī RV. X, 10, 4),
    andﾠ has a peculiar mystical power over women andﾠ a right to possess them RV. X, 85, 21 and 22; 40 and 41 ;
    for this reason he is invoked in marriage ceremonies AV. XIV, 2, 35 and 36 ;
    ecstatic states of mind andﾠ possession by evil spirits are supposed to be derived from the heavenly Gandharva (cf. - gṛihīta, - graha);
    the Gandharvas as a class have the same characteristic features as the one Gandharva;
    they live in the sky RV. AV. ṠBr. XIV,
    guard the Soma RV. IX, 113, 3 ṠBr. III AitBr. I, 27,
    are governed by Varuṇa (just as the Apsarasas are governed by Soma) ṠBr. XIII ĀṡvṠr. X, 7, 3,
    know the best medicines AV. VIII, 7, 23 VS. XII, 98,
    regulate the course of the asterisms ( AV. XIII, 1, 23 BhP. IV, 29, 21 ;
    hence twenty-seven are mentioned VS. IX, 7),
    follow after women andﾠ are desirous of intercourse with them (AV. ṠBr. III) ;
    as soon as a girl becomes marriageable, she belongs to Soma, the Gandharvas, andﾠ Agni Gṛihyās. II, 19 f. Pañcat. Suṡr. ;
    the wives of the Gandharvas are the Apsarasas
    (cf. gandharvâ̱psarás),
    andﾠ like them the Gandharvas are invoked in gambling with dice AV. VII, 109, 5 ;
    they are alsoﾠ feared as evil beings together with the Rākshasas, Kimīdins, Piṡācas, etc., amulets being worn as a protection against them ( AV. Suṡr.);
    they are said to have revealed the Vedas to Vāc
    ( ṠBr. III ; cf. PārGṛ. II, 12, 2),
    andﾠ are called the preceptors of the Ṛishis ṠBr. XI ;
    Purūravas is called among them ( ib.);
    in epic poetry the Gandharvas are the celestial musicians orﾠ heavenly singers (cf. RV. X, 177, 2)
    who form the orchestra at the banquets of the gods, andﾠ they belong together with the Apsarasas to Indra's heaven, sharing alsoﾠ in his battles;
    Yājñ. I, 71 MBh. Hariv. etc..; cf. RTL. p. 238 ;
    in the more systematic mythology the Gandharvas constitute one of the classes into which the higher creation is divided
    (i.e. gods, manes, Gandharvas AV. XI, 5, 2 ;
    orﾠ gods, Asuras, Gandharvas, men TS. VII, 8, 25, 2 ;
    cf. ṠBr. X ;
    orﾠ gods, men, Gandharvas, Apsarasas, Sarpas, andﾠ manes AitBr. III, 31, 5 ;
    for other enumerations cf. Nir. III, 8 Mn. I, 37 RTL. p. 237 ;
    III, 196; VII, 23; XII, 47 Nal. etc..);
    divine andﾠ human Gandharvas are distinguished
    ( TUp. II, 8 the divine orﾠ Deva-Gandharvas are enumerated MBh. I, 2550 ff. and 4810 ff.);
    another passage names 11 classes of Gandharvas (TĀr. I, 9, 3) ;
    the chief orﾠ leader of the Gandharvas is named Citra-ratha Bhag. X, 26 ;
    they are called the creatures of Prajāpati Mn. I, 37 ;
    orﾠ of Brahmā. Hariv. 11793 orﾠ of Kaṡyapa 11850 ;
    orﾠ of the Munis MBh. I, 2550 Hariv. 11553 ;
    orﾠ of Prādhā MBh. I, 2556 ;
    orﾠ of Arishṭā Hariv. 234 VP. I, 21 orﾠ of Vāc ( PadmaP.);
    with Jainas the Gandharvas constitute one of the eight classes of the Vyantaras>;
    N. of the attendant of the 17th Arhat of the present Avasarpiṇī L. ;
    a singer VarBṛS. LXXXVII, 33 BhP. I, 11, 21 ;
    the Koïl orﾠ black cuckoo L. ;
    a sage, pious man Mahīdh. on VS. XXXII, 9 ;
    a horse MBh. III, 11762 ;
    cf. II, 1043 ;
    the musk deer (derived fr. gandha) L. ;
    the soul after death andﾠ previous to its being born again (corresponding in some respects to the western notion of a ghost) L. ;
    N. of the 14th Kalpa orﾠ period of the world VāyuP. I, 21, 30 ;
    of the 21st Muhūrta Sūryapr. ;
    of a Svara orﾠ tone (for gāndhāra?) Hariv. II, 120, 4 ;
    m. pl. the Gandharvas ( seeﾠ above);
    N. of a people (named together with the Gāndhāras) R. VII, 100, 10 f. and 101, 2 ff. and 11 VarBṛS. XIV, 31 ;
    (ā) f. Durgā Hariv. II, 120, 4 (v.l. gāndharvī);
    (ī́) f. Gandharvī (daughter of Surabhi andﾠ mother of the race of horses MBh. I, 2631 f. R. III, 20, 28 f. VāyuP.)
    RV. X, 11, 2 R. ;
    night BhP. IV, 29, 21 ;
    + cf. Gk. κένταυρος fr. κενθαργγος
    - गन्धर्वकन्या
    - गन्धर्वखण्ड
    - गन्धर्वगृहीत
    - गन्धर्वग्रह
    - गन्धर्वतैल
    - गन्धर्वत्व
    - गन्धर्वदत्ता
    - गन्धर्वनगर
    - गन्धर्वपत्नी
    - गन्धर्वपद
    - गन्धर्वपुर
    - गन्धर्वराज
    - गन्धर्वर्तु
    - गन्धर्वलोक
    - गन्धर्वविद्या
    - गन्धर्वविवाह
    - गन्धर्ववेद
    - गन्धर्वहस्त
    - गन्धर्वहस्तक
    - गन्धर्वाप्सरस्
    - गन्धर्वेष्ठा

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > गन्धर्व

  • 13 adfero

    af-fĕro (better adf-), attŭli (adt-, better att-), allātum (adl-), afferre (adf-), v. a.; constr. aliquid ad aliquem or alicui.
    I.
    In gen., to bring, take, carry or convey a thing to a place (of portable things, while adducere denotes the leading or conducting of men, animals, etc.), lit. and trop.
    A.
    Lit.:

    lumen,

    Enn. Ann. 1, 40:

    viginti minas,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 78; 1, 3, 87 al.:

    adtuli hunc.—Quid, adtulisti?—Adduxi volui dicere,

    id. Ps. 2, 4, 21:

    tandem bruma nives adfert,

    Lucr. 5, 746: adlatus est acipenser, Cic. ap. Macr. S. 2, 12:

    adfer huc scyphos,

    Hor. Epod. 9, 33:

    nuces,

    Juv. 5, 144:

    cibum pede ad rostrum veluti manu,

    Plin. 10, 46, 63, § 129:

    pauxillum aquae,

    Vulg. Gen. 18, 4:

    caput ejus,

    ib. Marc. 6, 28.—With de in part. sense:

    adferte nobis de fructibus terrae,

    Vulg. Num. 13, 21; ib. Joan. 21, 10 (as lit. rendering of the Greek).—So of letters:

    adferre litteras, ad aliquem or alicui,

    Cic. Att. 8, 6; id. Imp. Pomp. 2; Liv. 22, 11 al.: adferre se ad aliquem locum, to betake one's self to a place, to go or come to (opp. auferre se ab aliquo, to withdraw from, to leave, only poet.):

    huc me adfero,

    Plaut. Am. 3, 4, 6; Ter. And. 4, 5, 12 Bentl.:

    Fatis huc te poscentibus adfers,

    Verg. A. 8, 477:

    sese a moenibus,

    id. ib. 3, 345.—So pass. adferri:

    urbem adferimur,

    are driven, come, Verg. A. 7, 217;

    and adferre pedem: abite illuc, unde malum pedem adtulistis,

    id. Cat. 14, 21.— To bring near, extend, = porrigo (eccl. Lat.):

    adfer manum tuam,

    reach hither, Vulg. Joan. 20, 27.—
    B.
    Trop., to bring to, upon, in a good or bad sense.
    (α).
    In bon. part.:

    pacem ad vos adfero,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 32:

    hic Stoicus genus sermonum adfert non liquidum,

    i.e. makes use of, Cic. de Or. 2, 38, 159:

    nihil ostentationis aut imitationis adferre,

    id. ib. 3, 12, 45:

    non minus adferret ad dicendum auctoritatis quam facultatis,

    id. Mur. 2, 4:

    consulatum in familiam,

    id. Phil. 9, 2:

    animum vacuum ad scribendas res difficiles,

    id. Att. 12, 38:

    tibi benedictionem,

    Vulg. Gen. 33, 11:

    Domino gloriam,

    ib. 1 Par. 16, 28; ib. Apoc. 21, 26: ignominiam, ib. Osee, 4, 18.—
    (β).
    In mal. part.:

    bellum in patriam,

    Ov. M. 12, 5:

    nisi etiam illuc pervenerint (canes), ut in dominum adferant dentes,

    to use their teeth against their master, Varr. R. R. 2, 9, 9:

    adferam super eos mala,

    Vulg. Jer. 23, 12:

    Quam accusationem adfertis adversus hominem hunc?

    id. Joan. 18, 29: quod gustatum adfert mortem, ib. Job, 6, 6: vim adferre alicui for inferre, to use force against or offer violence to one, Cic. Phil. 2, 7; id. Verr. 2, 1, 26; Liv. 9, 16; 42, 29 Drak.; Ov. H. 17, 21 Heins.; id. A. A. 1, 679; Suet. Oth. 12 al.: manus adferre alicui, in a bad sense, to lay hands on, attack, assail (opp.:

    manus abstinere ab aliquo): pro re quisque manus adfert (sc. ad pugnam),

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 26:

    domino a familiā suā manus adlatas esse,

    id. Quint. 27:

    intellegimus eum detrudi, cui manus adferuntur,

    id. Caecin. 17:

    qui sit improbissimus, manus ei adferantur, effodiantur oculi,

    id. Rep. 3, 17 Creuz. al.: sibi manus, to lay hands on one's self, to commit suicide: Qui quidem manus, quas justius in Lepidi perniciem animāsset, sibi adferre conatus est, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 23.—Also of things: manus templo, to rob or plunder, Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18:

    bonis alienis,

    id. Off. 2, 15:

    manus suis vulneribus,

    to tear open, id. Att. 3, 15 (a little before:

    ne rescindam ipse dolorem meum): manus beneficio suo,

    to nullify, render worthless, Sen. Ben. 2, 5 ext. —
    II.
    Esp.
    A.
    To bring, bear, or carry a thing, as news, to report, announce, inform, publish; constr. alicui or ad aliquem aliquid, or acc. with inf. (class.;

    in the histt., esp. in Livy, very freq.): ea adferam eaque ut nuntiem, etc.,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 9:

    istud quod adfers, aures exspectant meae,

    id. As. 2, 2, 65; Ter. Phorm. prol. 22:

    calamitas tanta fuit, ut eam non ex proelio nuntius, sed ex sermone rumor adferret,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 25:

    si ei subito sit adlatum periculum patriae,

    id. Off. 1, 43, 154:

    nihil novi ad nos adferebatur,

    id. Fam. 2, 14; id. Att. 6, 8: rumores, qui de me adferuntur, Cic. Fil. ap. Cic. Fam. 16, 21:

    Caelium ad illam adtulisse, se aurum quaerere,

    id. Cael. 24; so id. Fam. 5, 2 al.:

    magnum enim, quod adferebant, videbatur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 15 Dint.:

    cum crebri adferrent nuntii, male rem gerere Darium,

    Nep. 3, 3:

    haud vana adtulere,

    Liv. 4, 37; 6, 31:

    exploratores missi adtulerunt quieta omnia apud Gallos esse,

    id. 8, 17 Drak.:

    per idem tempus rebellāsse Etruscos adlatum est,

    word was brought, id. 10, 45 al.:

    idem ex Hispaniā adlatum,

    Tac. H. 1, 76:

    esse, qui magnum nescio quid adferret,

    Suet. Dom. 16; Luc. 1, 475:

    scelus adtulit umbris,

    Val. Fl. 3, 172 al. —So of instruction: doctrinam, Vulg. prol. Eccli.; ib. 2 Joan. 10.—
    B.
    To bring a thing on one, i.e. to cause, occasion, effect, give, impart; esp. of states of mind:

    aegritudinem alicui,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 2:

    alicui molestiam,

    id. Hec. 3, 2, 9:

    populo Romano pacem, tranquillitatem, otium, concordiam,

    Cic. Mur. 1:

    alicui multas lacrimas, magnam cladem,

    id. N. D. 2, 3, 7:

    ipsa detractio molestiae consecutionem adfert voluptatis,

    id. Fin. 1, 11, 37; so,

    adferre auctoritatem et fidem orationi,

    id. Phil. 12, 7:

    metum,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 25:

    dolorem,

    id. Sull. 1:

    luctum et egestatem,

    id. Rosc. Am. 5:

    consolationem,

    id. Att. 10, 4:

    delectationem,

    id. Fam. 7, 1 al.:

    detrimentum,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 82:

    taedium,

    Plin. 15, 2, 3, § 7:

    dolorem capitis,

    id. 23, 1, 18:

    gaudium,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 2, 1 al. —
    C.
    To bring forwards, allege, assert, adduce, as an excuse, reason, etc.:

    quam causam adferam?

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 23:

    justas causas adfers,

    Cic. Att. 11, 15;

    also without causa: rationes quoque, cur hoc ita sit, adferendas puto,

    id. Fin. 5, 10, 27; cf. id. Fam. 4, 13:

    idque me non ad meam defensionem adtulisse,

    id. Caecin. 29, 85:

    ad ea, quae dixi, adfer, si quid habes,

    id. Att. 7: nihil igitur adferunt, qui in re gerendā versari senectutem negant, they bring forwards nothing to the purpose, who, etc., id. Sen. 6; id. de Or. 2, 53, 215:

    quid enim poterit dicere?... an aetatem adferet?

    i. e. as an excuse, id. ib. 2, 89, 364.—Also absol.:

    Quid sit enim corpus sentire, quis adferet umquam...?

    will bring forwards an explanation, Lucr. 3, 354 (cf. reddo absol. in same sense, id. 1, 566):

    et, cur credam, adferre possum,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 29, 70; 3, 23, 55.—
    D.
    Adferre aliquid = conducere, conferre aliquid, to contribute any thing to a definite object, to be useful in any thing, to help, assist; constr. with ad, with dat., or absol.:

    quam ad rem magnum adtulimus adjumentum hominibus nostris,

    Cic. Off. 1, 1:

    negat Epicurus diuturnitatem temporis ad beate vivendum aliquid adferre,

    id. Fin. 2, 27, 87:

    quidquid ad rem publicam adtulimus, si modo aliquid adtulimus,

    id. Off. 1, 44, 155:

    illa praesidia non adferunt oratori aliquid, ne, etc.,

    id. Mil. 1: aliquid adtulimus etiam nos, id. Planc. 10, 24:

    quid enim oves aliud adferunt, nisi, etc.,

    id. N. D. 2, 63.—
    E.
    Very rare in class. period, to bring forth as a product, to yield, bear, produce, = fero:

    agri fertiles, qui multo plus adferunt, quam acceperunt,

    Cic. Off. 1, 15:

    herbam adferentem semen,

    Vulg. Gen. 1, 29:

    arva non adferent cibum,

    ib. Hab. 3, 17: lignum adtulit fructum, ib. Joel, 2, 22; ib. Apoc. 22, 2:

    ager fructum,

    ib. Luc. 12, 16 al.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adfero

  • 14 affero

    af-fĕro (better adf-), attŭli (adt-, better att-), allātum (adl-), afferre (adf-), v. a.; constr. aliquid ad aliquem or alicui.
    I.
    In gen., to bring, take, carry or convey a thing to a place (of portable things, while adducere denotes the leading or conducting of men, animals, etc.), lit. and trop.
    A.
    Lit.:

    lumen,

    Enn. Ann. 1, 40:

    viginti minas,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 78; 1, 3, 87 al.:

    adtuli hunc.—Quid, adtulisti?—Adduxi volui dicere,

    id. Ps. 2, 4, 21:

    tandem bruma nives adfert,

    Lucr. 5, 746: adlatus est acipenser, Cic. ap. Macr. S. 2, 12:

    adfer huc scyphos,

    Hor. Epod. 9, 33:

    nuces,

    Juv. 5, 144:

    cibum pede ad rostrum veluti manu,

    Plin. 10, 46, 63, § 129:

    pauxillum aquae,

    Vulg. Gen. 18, 4:

    caput ejus,

    ib. Marc. 6, 28.—With de in part. sense:

    adferte nobis de fructibus terrae,

    Vulg. Num. 13, 21; ib. Joan. 21, 10 (as lit. rendering of the Greek).—So of letters:

    adferre litteras, ad aliquem or alicui,

    Cic. Att. 8, 6; id. Imp. Pomp. 2; Liv. 22, 11 al.: adferre se ad aliquem locum, to betake one's self to a place, to go or come to (opp. auferre se ab aliquo, to withdraw from, to leave, only poet.):

    huc me adfero,

    Plaut. Am. 3, 4, 6; Ter. And. 4, 5, 12 Bentl.:

    Fatis huc te poscentibus adfers,

    Verg. A. 8, 477:

    sese a moenibus,

    id. ib. 3, 345.—So pass. adferri:

    urbem adferimur,

    are driven, come, Verg. A. 7, 217;

    and adferre pedem: abite illuc, unde malum pedem adtulistis,

    id. Cat. 14, 21.— To bring near, extend, = porrigo (eccl. Lat.):

    adfer manum tuam,

    reach hither, Vulg. Joan. 20, 27.—
    B.
    Trop., to bring to, upon, in a good or bad sense.
    (α).
    In bon. part.:

    pacem ad vos adfero,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 32:

    hic Stoicus genus sermonum adfert non liquidum,

    i.e. makes use of, Cic. de Or. 2, 38, 159:

    nihil ostentationis aut imitationis adferre,

    id. ib. 3, 12, 45:

    non minus adferret ad dicendum auctoritatis quam facultatis,

    id. Mur. 2, 4:

    consulatum in familiam,

    id. Phil. 9, 2:

    animum vacuum ad scribendas res difficiles,

    id. Att. 12, 38:

    tibi benedictionem,

    Vulg. Gen. 33, 11:

    Domino gloriam,

    ib. 1 Par. 16, 28; ib. Apoc. 21, 26: ignominiam, ib. Osee, 4, 18.—
    (β).
    In mal. part.:

    bellum in patriam,

    Ov. M. 12, 5:

    nisi etiam illuc pervenerint (canes), ut in dominum adferant dentes,

    to use their teeth against their master, Varr. R. R. 2, 9, 9:

    adferam super eos mala,

    Vulg. Jer. 23, 12:

    Quam accusationem adfertis adversus hominem hunc?

    id. Joan. 18, 29: quod gustatum adfert mortem, ib. Job, 6, 6: vim adferre alicui for inferre, to use force against or offer violence to one, Cic. Phil. 2, 7; id. Verr. 2, 1, 26; Liv. 9, 16; 42, 29 Drak.; Ov. H. 17, 21 Heins.; id. A. A. 1, 679; Suet. Oth. 12 al.: manus adferre alicui, in a bad sense, to lay hands on, attack, assail (opp.:

    manus abstinere ab aliquo): pro re quisque manus adfert (sc. ad pugnam),

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 26:

    domino a familiā suā manus adlatas esse,

    id. Quint. 27:

    intellegimus eum detrudi, cui manus adferuntur,

    id. Caecin. 17:

    qui sit improbissimus, manus ei adferantur, effodiantur oculi,

    id. Rep. 3, 17 Creuz. al.: sibi manus, to lay hands on one's self, to commit suicide: Qui quidem manus, quas justius in Lepidi perniciem animāsset, sibi adferre conatus est, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 23.—Also of things: manus templo, to rob or plunder, Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18:

    bonis alienis,

    id. Off. 2, 15:

    manus suis vulneribus,

    to tear open, id. Att. 3, 15 (a little before:

    ne rescindam ipse dolorem meum): manus beneficio suo,

    to nullify, render worthless, Sen. Ben. 2, 5 ext. —
    II.
    Esp.
    A.
    To bring, bear, or carry a thing, as news, to report, announce, inform, publish; constr. alicui or ad aliquem aliquid, or acc. with inf. (class.;

    in the histt., esp. in Livy, very freq.): ea adferam eaque ut nuntiem, etc.,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 9:

    istud quod adfers, aures exspectant meae,

    id. As. 2, 2, 65; Ter. Phorm. prol. 22:

    calamitas tanta fuit, ut eam non ex proelio nuntius, sed ex sermone rumor adferret,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 25:

    si ei subito sit adlatum periculum patriae,

    id. Off. 1, 43, 154:

    nihil novi ad nos adferebatur,

    id. Fam. 2, 14; id. Att. 6, 8: rumores, qui de me adferuntur, Cic. Fil. ap. Cic. Fam. 16, 21:

    Caelium ad illam adtulisse, se aurum quaerere,

    id. Cael. 24; so id. Fam. 5, 2 al.:

    magnum enim, quod adferebant, videbatur,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 15 Dint.:

    cum crebri adferrent nuntii, male rem gerere Darium,

    Nep. 3, 3:

    haud vana adtulere,

    Liv. 4, 37; 6, 31:

    exploratores missi adtulerunt quieta omnia apud Gallos esse,

    id. 8, 17 Drak.:

    per idem tempus rebellāsse Etruscos adlatum est,

    word was brought, id. 10, 45 al.:

    idem ex Hispaniā adlatum,

    Tac. H. 1, 76:

    esse, qui magnum nescio quid adferret,

    Suet. Dom. 16; Luc. 1, 475:

    scelus adtulit umbris,

    Val. Fl. 3, 172 al. —So of instruction: doctrinam, Vulg. prol. Eccli.; ib. 2 Joan. 10.—
    B.
    To bring a thing on one, i.e. to cause, occasion, effect, give, impart; esp. of states of mind:

    aegritudinem alicui,

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 2:

    alicui molestiam,

    id. Hec. 3, 2, 9:

    populo Romano pacem, tranquillitatem, otium, concordiam,

    Cic. Mur. 1:

    alicui multas lacrimas, magnam cladem,

    id. N. D. 2, 3, 7:

    ipsa detractio molestiae consecutionem adfert voluptatis,

    id. Fin. 1, 11, 37; so,

    adferre auctoritatem et fidem orationi,

    id. Phil. 12, 7:

    metum,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 25:

    dolorem,

    id. Sull. 1:

    luctum et egestatem,

    id. Rosc. Am. 5:

    consolationem,

    id. Att. 10, 4:

    delectationem,

    id. Fam. 7, 1 al.:

    detrimentum,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 82:

    taedium,

    Plin. 15, 2, 3, § 7:

    dolorem capitis,

    id. 23, 1, 18:

    gaudium,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 2, 1 al. —
    C.
    To bring forwards, allege, assert, adduce, as an excuse, reason, etc.:

    quam causam adferam?

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 23:

    justas causas adfers,

    Cic. Att. 11, 15;

    also without causa: rationes quoque, cur hoc ita sit, adferendas puto,

    id. Fin. 5, 10, 27; cf. id. Fam. 4, 13:

    idque me non ad meam defensionem adtulisse,

    id. Caecin. 29, 85:

    ad ea, quae dixi, adfer, si quid habes,

    id. Att. 7: nihil igitur adferunt, qui in re gerendā versari senectutem negant, they bring forwards nothing to the purpose, who, etc., id. Sen. 6; id. de Or. 2, 53, 215:

    quid enim poterit dicere?... an aetatem adferet?

    i. e. as an excuse, id. ib. 2, 89, 364.—Also absol.:

    Quid sit enim corpus sentire, quis adferet umquam...?

    will bring forwards an explanation, Lucr. 3, 354 (cf. reddo absol. in same sense, id. 1, 566):

    et, cur credam, adferre possum,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 29, 70; 3, 23, 55.—
    D.
    Adferre aliquid = conducere, conferre aliquid, to contribute any thing to a definite object, to be useful in any thing, to help, assist; constr. with ad, with dat., or absol.:

    quam ad rem magnum adtulimus adjumentum hominibus nostris,

    Cic. Off. 1, 1:

    negat Epicurus diuturnitatem temporis ad beate vivendum aliquid adferre,

    id. Fin. 2, 27, 87:

    quidquid ad rem publicam adtulimus, si modo aliquid adtulimus,

    id. Off. 1, 44, 155:

    illa praesidia non adferunt oratori aliquid, ne, etc.,

    id. Mil. 1: aliquid adtulimus etiam nos, id. Planc. 10, 24:

    quid enim oves aliud adferunt, nisi, etc.,

    id. N. D. 2, 63.—
    E.
    Very rare in class. period, to bring forth as a product, to yield, bear, produce, = fero:

    agri fertiles, qui multo plus adferunt, quam acceperunt,

    Cic. Off. 1, 15:

    herbam adferentem semen,

    Vulg. Gen. 1, 29:

    arva non adferent cibum,

    ib. Hab. 3, 17: lignum adtulit fructum, ib. Joel, 2, 22; ib. Apoc. 22, 2:

    ager fructum,

    ib. Luc. 12, 16 al.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > affero

  • 15 ἵστημι

    ἵστημι (cf. ἱστάω, ἱστάνω),
    I causal, make to stand, imper.

    ἵστη Il.21.313

    , E.Supp. 1230,

    καθ-ίστα Il.9.202

    : [tense] impf. ἵστην, [dialect] Ep.

    ἵστασκε Od.19.574

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    ἵσταν B.10.112

    : [tense] fut. στήσω, [dialect] Dor.

    στᾱσῶ Theoc.5.54

    : [tense] aor. 1 ἔστησα, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl. ἔστᾰσαν for ἔστησαν dub. in Od.18.307, 3.182, 8.435, al. (v. ἔστᾰσαν): hence, in late Poets, ἔστᾰσας, ἔστᾰσε, AP9.714,708 (Phil.): [tense] aor. 1 [voice] Med. ἐστησάμην (never intr.), v. infr.A.111.2, 3: [tense] pf.

    ἕστᾰκα Cerc.3

    , ([etym.] καθ-) Hyp.Eux.28, UPZ 112.5 (ii B.C.), ([etym.] περι-) Pl.Ax. 370d, ([etym.] ἀφ-) LXXJe.16.5, ([etym.] παρ-) Phld.Rh. 1.9S., al., ([etym.] συν-) S.E.M.7.109; also ἕστηκα (v. infr.) in trans. sense, ([etym.] δι-) Arist.Vent. 973a18, ([etym.] ἀφ-) v.l. in LXX l.c.; ἑστακεῖα trans. in Test.Epict.1.25.
    II intr., stand,
    1 [voice] Act., [tense] aor. 2 ἔστην, [dialect] Ep.

    στάσκον Il.3.217

    ; [ per.] 3pl. ἔστησαν, more freq. in Hom. ἔσταν, στάν [ᾰ]; imper. στῆθι, [dialect] Dor.

    στᾶθι Sapph.29

    , Theoc.23.38; subj. στῶ, [dialect] Ep. 2 and [ per.] 3sg. στήῃς, στήῃ (for στῇς, στῇ), Il.17.30, 5.598; [ per.] 1pl. στέωμεν (as disyll.) 22.231,

    στείομεν 15.297

    ; opt. σταῖεν, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl.

    σταίησαν 17.733

    ; inf. στῆναι, [dialect] Ep.

    στήμεναι 17.167

    , Od.5.414, [dialect] Dor.

    στᾶμεν Pi.P.4.2

    ; part. στάς: [tense] pf. ἕστηκα: [tense] plpf. ἑστήκειν, sts. with strengthd. augm. εἱστήκειν, as E.HF 925, Ar.Av. 513, Th.1.89, etc.; [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3sg.

    ἑστήκεε Hdt. 7.152

    :—from Hom. downwds. the shorter dual and pl. forms of the [tense] pf. are preferred, ἕστᾰτον, ἕστᾰμεν, ἕστᾰτε, ἑστᾶσι (IG12(8).356 (Thasos, vi B.C.), etc.), in Hdt. ἑστέᾱσι; imper.

    ἕστᾰθι Aristomen. 5

    ; subj. ἑστῶ; opt. ἑσταίην; inf. ἑστάναι, [dialect] Ep. ἑστάμεν, ἑστάμεναι ( ἑστηκέναι only late, as Ael.VH3.18); part. ἑστώς ( ἑστηκώς rare in early Gr., Hdt.2.126, Pl.Men. 93d, Lg. 802c, Arist. (infr. B.11.2), Alex.126.16,

    εἱστηκότα IG12.374.179

    ), fem. ἑστῶσα (not ἑστυῖα; but συνεστηκυιῶν prob. in Hp.Aër.10), neut.

    ἑστός Pl.Ti. 40b

    , Tht. 183e, SIG 1234 ([place name] Lycia), etc., ([etym.] καθ-) POxy.68.32 (ii A.D.), ([etym.] ἐν-) PRyl. 98 (a).10 (ii A.D.), ([etym.] παρ-) Ar.Eq. 564 (- ώς freq. v.l. as in Pl. and Ar. ll.cc., preferred by Choerob.in Theod.2.313); gen. ἑστῶτος; [dialect] Ion. ἑστεώς, ἑστεός, ῶτος; [dialect] Ep.

    ἑστηώς Hes.Th. 747

    ; dat. pl. ἑστηῶσι cj. in Antim.16.5, cf. Call.Dian. 134; Hom. does not use the nom., but has gen. ἑστᾰότος, acc. ἑστᾰότα, nom. pl. ἑστᾰότες, as if from ἑσταώς: so also [tense] plpf. ἑστάτην, ἕστᾰμεν, ἕστᾰτε, ἕστᾰσαν: late [tense] pres. ἑστήκω, formed from [tense] pf., Posidipp. ap. Ath.10.412e: hence, [tense] fut.

    ἑστήξω Hom. Epigr.15.14

    , X.Cyr.6.2.17, Hegesipp.1.25,

    ἑστήξομαι X.Cyn.10.9

     codd.
    2 [voice] Pass., ἵσταμαι: imper.

    ἵστασο Hes.Sc. 449

    ,

    ἵστω S.Ph. 893

    , Ar.Ec. 737: [tense] impf. ἱστάμην: [tense] fut.

    στᾰθήσομαι And.3.34

    , Aeschin. 3.103: more freq.

    στήσομαι Il.20.90

    , etc.: [tense] aor.

    ἐστάθην Od.17.463

    , etc.; rarely ἔστην, [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3sg.

    ἔσστα SIG56.43

     (Argos, v B.C.): [tense] pf. ἕσταμαι ([etym.] δι-) v.l. in Pl.Ti. 81d, κατεστέαται v.l. in Hdt.1.196. (From I.-E. sthā-, cf. Skt. sthā- ([tense] aor. á-sthā-t), Lat. stare, etc.; Gr. redupl. [tense] pres. and [tense] pf. fr. si-sthā-, se-sthā-.)
    A Causal, make to stand, set up,

    πελέκεας ἑξείης Od.19.574

    ; ἔγχος μέν ῥ' ἔστησε φέρων πρὸς κίονα he set it against the pillar, 1.127, cf. Il. 15.126; ἱ. ἱστόν set up the loom, or raise the mast (v.

    ἱστός 1

     and 11); κρητῆρας στήσασθαι to have bowls set up, Od.2.431; θεοῖς.. κρητῆρα στήσασθαι in honour of the gods, Il.6.528; στῆσαί τινα ὀρθόν, στ. ὀρθὰν καρδίαν, Pi.P.3.53,96;

    ὀρθῷ στ. ἐπὶ σφυρῷ Id.I.7(6).13

    ;

    ἐς ὀρθὸν ἱ. τινά E.Supp. 1230

    ;

    ὁ Ξανθίας τὸν φαλλὸν ὀρθὸν στησάτω Ar.Ach. 243

    ;

    ὀρθὸν οὖς ἵστησιν S.El.27

    ; στῆσαι λόγχας, for battle, Id.Ant. 145(lyr.); esp. raise buildings, statues, trophies, etc.,

    ἱ. ἀνδριάντα Hdt.2.110

    ;

    τροπαῖα S.Tr. 1102

    ;

    τροπαῖον ἱ. τῶν πολεμίων Isoc.4.150

    , cf.IG22.1457.26;

    τροπαῖον στησάμενοι X.HG2.4.7

    ;

    τροπαῖον ἂν στήσαιτο τῶν ταύτης τρόπων Ar.Pl. 453

    ;

    τὰ μακρὰ στῆσαι τείχη Th.1.69

    ; ἱ. τινὰ χαλκοῦν set him up in brass, raise a brazen statue to him, D.13.21, 19.261 (so in [tense] pf., stand,

    οὗτος ἕστηκε λίθινος Hdt.2.141

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    σφυρήλατος ἐν Ὀλυμπία στάθητι Pl.Phdr. 236b

    ;

    σταθῆναι χαλκοῦς Arist.Rh. 1410a33

    ).
    III bring to a standstill, stay, check,

    λαὸν δὲ στῆσον Il.6.433

    ; νέας, ἵππους, ἡμιόνους στῆσαι, Od.3.182, Il.5.755, 24.350; μύλην στῆσαι to stop the mill, Od.20.111; στῆσεν ἄρ' (sc. ἡμιόνους) 7.4; στῆσε δ' ἐν Ἀμνισῷ (sc. νῆα) 19.188;

    βᾶριν Iamb.Myst.6.5

    ; στῆσαι τὴν φάλαγγα halt it, X.Cyr.7.1.5;

    ἵστησι ῥοῦν Pl.Cra. 437b

    , etc.; ἵ. τὴν ψυχὴν ἐπὶ τοῖς πράγμασιν ib. 437a; στ. τὰ ὄμματα fix them, of a dying man, Id.Phd. 118; στ. τὸ πρόσωπον compose the countenance, X.Cyr.1.3.9;

    στήσαντες ἐπὶ τούτων τὴν διήγησιν Plb. 3.2.6

    : esp. in Medic.,

    ἵ. κοιλίαν Dsc.1.20

    ; τὰς κοιλίας Philotim. ap. Orib.4.10.1;

    αἱμορραγίας Dsc.1.129

    : abs., Arist.HA 605a29:—[voice] Med.,

    ἱστάμενος τῷ νοσήματι Hp.Ep.19

     ( Hermes 53.65).
    2 set on foot, stir up,

    κονίης.. ἱστᾶσιν ὀμίχλην Il.13.336

    ;

    ἵστη δὲ μέγα κῦμα 21.313

    ;

    νεφέλην ἔστησε Κρονίων Od.12.405

    , cf. Il.5.523; of battle, etc., φυλόπιδα στήσειν stir up strife, Od.11.314;

    ἔριν στήσαντες 16.292

     (so intr. φύλοπις ἕστηκε the fray is on foot, Il.18.172):—also in [voice] Med., στησάμενοι δ' ἐμάχοντο ib. 533, Od.9.54;

    πολέμους ἵστασθαι Hdt.7.9

    .β', 175, 236; so

    ἱστάναι βοήν A.Ch. 885

    ;

    κραυγήν E.Or. 1529

     ([voice] Pass., θόρυβος ἵσταται βοῆς arises, S.Ph. 1263); also of passions and states of mind, μῆνιν, ἐλπίδα στῆσαι, Id.OT 699, E.IA 788(lyr.).
    3 set up, appoint,

    τινὰ βασιλέα Hdt.1.97

    ;

    τύραννον S.OT 940

    , cf. OC 1041, Ant. 666:—[voice] Med.,

    ἐστάσαντο τύραννον Alc.37

    A;

    φύλακας στησόμεθα Pl.R. 484d

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὁ ὑπὸ Δαρείου σταθεὶς ὕπαρχος Hdt.7.105

    , cf. IG 9(1).32.23 (Stiris, ii B.C.).
    4 establish, institute, χορούς, παννυχίδα, Hdt.3.48, 4.76 (so

    στήσασθαι ἤθεά τε καὶ νόμους Id.2.35

    ;

    ἀγῶνα h.Ap. 150

    ); στῆσαι χορόν, Ὀλυμπιάδα, ἑορτάν, Pi.P.9.114, O.2.3, 10(11).58;

    κτερίσματα S.El. 433

    ;

    χορούς B.10.112

    , D.21.51; οὐχ ὑγιῶς ἱστάμενος λόγον setting up a bad argument, Anon.Lond.26.34:—[voice] Pass.,

    ἀγορὴ ἵσταταί τινι Hdt.6.58

    .
    5 = Lat. statuere, determine,

    γνῶναι καὶ στῆσαι D.H.8.68

    ;

    διαγεινώσκειν καὶ ἱστάναι Not. Arch.4.21

     (Aug.):—[voice] Pass.,

    τὰ ὑπό τινος σταθέντα OGI665.27

     (Egypt, i A.D.); τὰ ἑσταμένα Wilcken Chr.167.27 (ii B.C.).
    6 fix by agreement,

    ὁ σταθεὶς τόκος PGrenf.1.31.1

     (i B.C.), cf. PFlor.14.11 (iv A.D.);

    τὸ ἑσταμένον ἐνοίκιον BGU253.15

     (iii A.D.).
    7 bring about, cause,

    ἀμπνοάν Pi.P.4.199

    ; στῆσαι δύσκηλον χθόνα make its case desperate, A.Eu. 825.
    IV place in the balance, weigh, Il.19.247, 22.350, 24.232, Ar.V.40; [ ἐκπώματα] Thphr.Char.18.7;

    ἀριθμοῦντες καὶ μετροῦντες καὶ ἱστάντες X.Cyr.8.2.21

    , etc.; ἱστάναι τι πρὸς ἀργύριον weigh a thing against silver, Hdt.2.65; ἀγαθὸς ἱστάναι good at weighing, Pl.Prt. 356b; τὸ ἐγγὺς καὶ τὸ πόρρω στήσας ἐν τῷ ζυγῷ ibid., cf. Lys.10.18; ἐπὶ τὸ ἱστάναι ἐλθεῖν have recourse to the scales, Pl.Euthphr.7c:—[voice] Pass.,

    ἵστασθαι ἐπὶ ζυγοῦ Arr.Epict.1.29.15

    ;

    σταθείς

     weighed,

    IG11(2).161

    B113 (Delos, iii B.C.).
    2 weigh out, pay, LXX 3 Ki.21.39, cf. Za.11.12, Ev.Matt.26.15.
    B [voice] Pass. and intr. tenses of [voice] Act., to be set or placed, stand, Hom. etc., ἀγχοῦ, ἆσσον, Il.2.172, 23.97;

    ἄντα τινός 17.30

    ;

    ἐς μέσσον Od.17.447

    ;

    σταθεὶς ἐς μέσον Hdt.3.130

    ; ἀντίοι ἔσταν, ἐναντίοι ἔστησαν, Il.1.535, Od.10.391: prov. of critical circumstances,

    ἐπὶ ξυροῦ ἵσταται ἀκμῆς Il.10.173

    : freq. merely a stronger form of εἶναι, to be in a certain place or state,

    ἀργύρεοι σταθμοὶ ἐν χαλκέῳ ἕστασαν οὐδῷ Od.7.89

    , etc.; ἑστάτω for ἔστω, S.Aj. 1084; τὰ νῦν ἑστῶτα,= τὰ νῦν, Id.Tr. 1271 (anap.);

    ἐμοὶ δ' ἄχος ἕστᾱκεν Id.Aj. 200

    (lyr.): with Adv., ξυμφορᾶς ἵν' ἕσταμεν, ἵν' ἕστ. χρείας, in what case or need we are, Id.Tr. 1145, OT 1442; ποῦ τύχης ἕστηκεν; Id.Aj. 102; later also ἀδίκως, ὀρθῶς, εὐλαβῶς ἵστασθαι, behave wrongly, etc., Plb.18.3.2, 33.6.3, 18.33.4.
    3 in pregnant sense,

    στῆναι ἐς.. Hdt.9.21

    ;

    στ. ἐς δίκην E.IT 962

    ;

    στ. παρά τινα Il.24.169

     (but οἱ μὴ στάντες παρὰ τὰ δεινά those who did not face the danger, D.H.9.28): c. acc. loci, τί τοῦτ' αἰθερίαν ἕστηκε πέτραν; E.Supp. 987 (lyr.);

    στῆτε τόνδε τρίβον Id.Or. 1251

    :c. acc. cogn., ποίαν μ' ἀνάστασιν δοκεῖς.. στῆναι; S.Ph. 277.
    II stand still, halt,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δὴ στέωμεν Il.11.348

    , cf. Od.6.211, 10.97; opp. φεύγω, 6.199, etc.; stand idle, Il.4.243, al.; ἑστάναι to be stationary, opp. κινεῖσθαι, Pl.R. 436c, etc.;

    κατὰ χώρην ἑστάναι Hdt.4.97

    ; οὐ μὴν ἐνταῦθ' ἕστηκε τὸ πρᾶγμα does not rest here, D.21.102, cf. 10.36; ἐὰν ἡ κοιλία στῇ if the bowels are constipated, Arist.HA 588a8: c. part.,

    οὐ στήσεται ἀδικῶν D.10.10

    ; come to a stop, rest satisfied,

    ἄν τις ὀρθῶς ἐπιβάλῃ, ἔπειτα σταθῇ Epicur. Fr. 423

    ;

    οὐχ ἱστάμενοι Plot.3.1.2

    : impers., ἵσταται there is a stop, one comes to a stop, Arist.APr. 43a37, al.;

    οὐκ ἔστη ἐνταῦθα κακοῖς γενομένοις ἀποθανεῖν Plot.3.2.8

    ; also

    ἵστασθαι μέχρι τοῦ γένους Them.in APo. 55.8

    ,al.
    2 metaph., stand firm, X.HG5.2.23;

    τῇ διανοίᾳ Plb.21.11.3

    ; of arguments or propositions, hold good, Phld.Rh.1.83, 2.192 S.: part., ἑστηκώς fixed, stable, Arist.GA 776a35, EN 1104a4, Metaph. 1047a15;

    δεῖ τὸ κρίμα ἑστηκὸς καὶ κύριον εἶναι SIG826ii29

     (Delph., ii B.C.);

    λογισμὸς ἑστὼς καὶ νουνεχής Plb.3.105.9

    ;

    τέχναι οὐκ ἔχουσαι τὸ ἑστηκός, ἀλλὰ τὸ στοχαστικόν Phld.Rh.1.71S.

     (so Adv. ἑστηκότως, opp. στοχαστικῶς, ib.70S.), cf. Iamb.Protr.21.

    κ'; χρεία ἑστηκυῖα καὶ τεταγμένη Plb.6.25.10

    ; ἑστηκότα θεωρήματα, ἑστηκότες σκοποί, Phld.Rh.1.2S., Po.5.22; of age,

    ἑστηκυῖα ἡλικία Pl.Lg. 802c

    ; τιμαὶ ἑστηκυῖαι fixed prices, PTeb.ined.703.177.
    III to be set up or upright, stand up, rise up,

    κρημνοὶ ἕστασαν Il.12.55

    ;

    ὀρθαὶ τρίχες ἔσταν 24.359

    , cf. A.Th. 564(lyr.), Pl. Ion 535c, etc.;

    κονίη ἵστατο Il.2.151

    ;

    ἵστατο κῦμα 21.240

    ; of a horse, ἵστασθαι ὀρθός to rear, Hdt.5.111; ἵστασθαι βάθρων from the steps, S.OT 143.
    2 to be set up, erected, or built,

    στήλη, ἥ τ' ἐπὶ τύμβῳ ἑστήκῃ Il.17.435

    ;

    ἕστακε τροπαῖον A. Th. 954

    (lyr.);

    μνημεῖον Ar.Eq. 268

    , etc.; v. supr. A.11.
    3 generally, arise, begin,

    ἵστατο νεῖκος Il.13.333

    ; cf. A. 111.2.
    4 in marking Time, ἔαρος νέον ἱσταμένοιο when spring is not long begun, Od.19.519; ἕβδομος ἑστήκει μείς the seventh month was begun, Il. 19.117; τοῦ μὲν φθίνοντος μηνός, τοῦ δ' ἱσταμένοιο as one month ends and the next begins, Od.14.162, cf. Hes.Op. 780; later μὴν ἱστάμενος, μεσῶν, φθίνων, first in Hdt.6.57, 106, cf. And.1.121, Aeschin.3.67;

    σχεδὸν ἤδη μεσημβρία ἵσταται Pl.Phdr. 242a

    .
    5 to be appointed,

    στῆναι ἐς ἀρχήν Hdt.3.80

    ; v. supr. A.111.3.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἵστημι

  • 16 Geistesverfassungen

    pl
    states of mind

    Deutsch-Englisches Wörterbuch > Geistesverfassungen

  • 17 κολαφίζω

    κολαφίζω 1 aor. ἐκολάφισα (non-Attic, vernacular word fr. κόλαφις; s. Lobeck, Phryn. 175 [cp. Terence, Adelphi. 245 colaphis tuber est totum caput=(my) head is lumpy from (his) blows]; Mlt-H. 364; 407. Found almost exclusively in Christian lit.; also in Paus. Attic. κ, 38; a Gr-Rom. letter: Sb 6263, 23 [Rom. times]; TestJos 7:5 v.l.—Hesychius: κολαφιζόμενος• ῥαπιζόμενος; Etym. Mag. 525, 4)
    ① to strike sharply, esp. with the hand, strike with the fist, beat, cuff τινά someone. Lit. Mt 26:67; Mk 14:65 (KSchmidt, MGoguel Festschr. ’50, 218–27); MPol 2:4 (v.l.). Of mistreatment in general: we are roughly treated 1 Cor 4:11. εἰ κολαφιζόμενοι ὑπομενεῖτε if you endure being beaten 1 Pt 2:20 (κολαζόμενοι v.l.).
    ② to cause physical impairment, torment, fig. extension of 1, of painful attacks of an illness, described as a physical beating by a messenger of Satan 2 Cor 12:7. The data for a scientific diagnosis are few, and it is not surprising that a variety of views, characterized by much guesswork, have been held:
    ⓐ epilepsy: MKrenkel, Beiträge 1890, 47ff; Schmiedel and Bousset ad loc.; WWrede, Paulus2 1907, 17; HFischer (physician), D. Krankheit d. Ap. Pls. 1911; s. also WWeber (psychiatrist), TLZ 37, 1912, 623; FConybeare in WBundy, The Psychic Health of Jesus 1922, 226f; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls. 1930, 152; JKlausner, From Jesus to Paul ’43, 325–30.
    ⓑ hysteria: ELombard, Les extases et les souffrances de l’apôtre Paul: RTP 36, 1903, 450–500; Windisch ad loc.; FFenner, D. Krankheit im NT 1930, 30–40.
    ⓒ periodic depression, s. KBonhoeffer (physician) in Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.
    ⓓ headaches, severe eye-trouble: Seeligmüller (physician), War Paulus Epileptiker? 1910; cp. WWeber, TLZ 36, 1911, 235; Uhle-Wettler, Evang. Kirchenztg. 87, 1913, 130ff; 145ff.
    ⓔ malaria: Ramsay, Church2 63ff; Sickenberger, comm. ad loc.
    ⓕ leprosy: EPreuschen, ZNW 2, 1901, 193f; REisler, Ιησους βασιλευς II 1930, 426ff; 794.
    ⓖ an impediment in speech (stammering): WClarke, ET 39, 1928, 458–60. S. also on σκόλοψ.—On interpretations (formerly favored by many) in the direction of inward temptations, brought about by opponents, or pangs of conscience, or distressed states of mind, s. GHeinrici in KEK8 1900 ad loc.; PMenoud: JdeZwaan Festschr. ’53 thinks of the anxieties of a missionary’s life.—B. 553 s.v. κόλαφος. DELG s.v. κόλαφος. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κολαφίζω

  • 18 μετά

    μετά (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in the NT not (B-D-F §203; Rob. 610) w. dat.—For lit. s. ἀνά, beg.; also for μετά (and σύν) Tycho Mommsen, Beiträge zu d. Lehre v. den griech. Präp. 1895. Basic idea: ‘in the vicinity of ’.
    A. w. gen. with
    ① marker of placement, with, among, in company with someone (Gen 42:5; EpArist 180; En 22:13; 99:10; PsSol 4:6; JosAs 10:3 al.) or someth. ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων he was among the wild animals Mk 1:13 (Diog. L. 6, 92 μόσχοι μετὰ λύκων). ἦν συγκαθήμενος μ. τῶν ὑπηρετῶν he sat down among the servants 14:54. μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη he was classed among the criminals Mk 15:28; Lk 22:37. τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μ. τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει he will assign him his lot among the faithless (unbelievers?) Lk 12:46; cp. Mt 24:51. ζῆτειν τὸν ζῶντα μ. τῶν νεκρῶν seek the living among the dead Lk 24:5. μὴ γογγύζετε μετʼ ἀλλήλων do not grumble among yourselves J 6:43. εἱστήκει Ἰούδας μετʼ αὐτῶν 18:5. ἡ σκηνὴ τ. θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων Rv 21:3a. μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν in the midst of the clouds 1:7.
    ② marker of assoc. in gener. sense denoting the company within which someth. takes place, with
    ⓐ w. gen. of pers. in company w. whom someth. takes place
    α. w. verbs of going, remaining, etc. προσέρχεσθαι μ. τινος come (in company) with someone Mt 20:20; cp. 5:41; Mk 1:29; 3:7; 5:24, 37; 11:11; 14:17; Lk 2:51; 6:17; 9:49; 14:31; J 3:22b; 11:54; Ac 24:1; Gal 2:1. Angels accompanying the Messiah Mt 25:31; cp. 16:27; Mk 8:38; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 1:7. περιπατεῖν μ. τινος (Menand., Fgm. 178 Kö., Sam. 587f S. [242f Kö.]; ApcEsdr 6:12) J 6:66. γίνεσθαι μ. τινος be, remain with someone Ac 7:38; 9:19; 20:18; AcPlCor 2:4 (ApcMos 2 ἐγένοντο μ. ἀλλήλων). οἱ μ. αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his companions Mk 16:10. μένειν μ. τινος stay with someone 1J 2:19 (ParJer 3:15). ζήσασα μ. ἀνδρός Lk 2:36. ἀκολουθεῖν μ. τινος follow (after) someone Rv 6:8; 14:13 (s. ἀκολουθέω 2).
    β. used w. trans. verbs ἄγειν τινὰ μ. ἑαυτοῦ bring someone along (s. ἄγω 1b) 2 Ti 4:11. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ take or bring someone along (as a companion) (Gen 22:3) Mt 12:45; 18:16; Mk 14:33. ἔχειν τι μ. ἑαυτοῦ have someth. with oneself: bread 8:14; τινά someone (PGM 4, 1952): the lame Mt 15:30; the poor Mk 14:7; Mt 26:11; J 12:8; the bridegroom Mk 2:19b. Pass. συγκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τ. ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων he was chosen (to serve) with the eleven apostles Ac 1:26 (cp. Himerius, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 3 μετὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀριθμούμενος=numbered with the gods).
    γ. esp. εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, in someone’s company.
    א. lit. of close association: the disciples w. Jesus Mt 26:69, 71; Mk 3:14; 14:67; Lk 22:59; J 15:27; 17:24. Also of accompaniment for a short time Mt 5:25; J 3:26; 9:40; 12:17; 20:24, 26. Of Jesus’ association w. his disciples 13:33; 14:9; 16:4; 17:12. Of relations between the superintendent and the congregation μετὰ τ. ἐπισκόπου εἶναι be with, on the side of, the supervisor/bishop IPhld 3:2. οἱ μ. τινος (sc. ὄντες) someone’s friends, companions, etc. (Diod S 17, 96, 2 οἱ μεθʼ Ἡρακλέους; SIG 175, 5; 659, 5; 826e II, 30; Am 4:2; 8:10; Gen 24:59; 1 Macc 7:23; JosAs 27:7; AscIs 2:15; 3:6, 14; Jos., Vi. 397, Ant. 7, 20; Just., D. 8, 3 al.) Mt 12:3f; 26:51; Mk 1:36; 2:25; Lk 6:3f. Of things ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μ. αὐτοῦ other boats were with him, accompanied him Mk 4:36. ὁ μισθός μου μετʼ ἐμοῦ (sc. ἐστιν) Rv 22:12. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ the fire (of judgment) awaits him (the interpretation of the Armenian text; sim. the Lat.) AcPlCor 2:37.
    ב. in ref. to supportiveness be with someone, stand by, help someone of God’s help (Gen 21:20; 26:3; 28:20 al.; Jos., Ant. 15, 138) J 3:2; 8:29; 16:32; Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 39:2, 21); 10:38; cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 8:8); Lk 1:28; Ro 15:33. Of God’s hand (1 Ch 4:10) Lk 1:66; Ac 11:21. Of Christ: Mt 28:20; Ac 18:10.
    ג. a favorite expr. in conclusions of letters ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης ἔσται μ. ὑμῶν will be with you 2 Cor 13:11; cp. Phil 4:9; ὁ κύριος κτλ. 2 Th 3:16 (cp. Ruth 2:4); 2 Ti 4:22. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μ. ὑμῶν (sc. ἔσται) 1 Cor 16:23; cp. 1 Th 5:28; 1 Cl 65:2. μ. τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25; 21:9. μ. πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Th 3:18; cp. Eph 6:24. Short and to the point: ἡ χάρις μ. ὑμῶν Col 4:18; 1 Ti 6:21; cp. Tit 3:15; Hb 13:25. ἔσται μεθʼ ἡμῶν χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη 2J 3.—ἡ ἀγάπη μου μ. πάντων ὑμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ my love is with you all in Christ Jesus 1 Cor 16:24. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τ. θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Cor 13:13 (WvanUnnik, Dominus Vobiscum: liturg. formula, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 270–305; on the Trinitarian formula s. the lit. on πνεῦμα 8).—In the expr. ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μ. αὐτῶν Ac 14:27; 15:4 (cp. Hs 5, 1, 1) ὤν could be supplied what God has done in helping them; but ποιεῖν can just as well go w. μ. αὐτῶν has done for them, after the analogy of עָשָׂה עִם פּ׳ (Tob 12:6; 13:7 ἃ ποιήσει μεθʼ ὑμῶν; Jdth 8:26 ὅσα ἐποίησεν μετὰ Ἀβραάμ; 15:10; 1 Macc 10:27. In addition, cp. BGU 798, 8 εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῇ ἡμῶν δεσποίνῃ εἰς πάντα τὰ καλὰ ἃ ἐποίησεν μετὰ τ. δούλων αὐτῆς. But s. also LMaloney, ‘All That God Had Done with Them’ ’91, 118–21: God works ‘with’ the apostles and ‘through’ them). Here also belongs ποιεῖν ἔλεος μ. τινος have mercy on someone, show mercy to someone (Gen 24:12; 2 Km 3:8; JosAs 23:4) Lk 1:72; 10:37 (MWilcox, The Semitisms in Ac, ’65, 84f). ἐμεγάλυνεν κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετʼ αὐτῆς the Lord has shown great mercy to her 1:58 (cp. 1 Km 12:24; Ps 125:2f).—In πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μ. τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28=Ps 15:11 the LXX has literally translated אֶת־פָּנֶיךָ; it means in your presence.
    ד. in ref. to taking sides or being allied in some way with someone: in contrast to εἶναι κατά τινος be against someone is εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, on someone’s side Mt 12:30a; Lk 11:23a (AFridrichsen, ZNW 13, 1912, 273–80).
    ⓑ to denote the company in which an activity or experience takes place: ἀνακεῖσθαι μ. τινος recline at table with someone (for a meal) Mt 26:20. ἀνακλιθῆναι 8:11; cp. Lk 24:30. βασιλεύειν Rv 20:4, 6. γρηγορεῖν Mt 26:38, 40. δειπνεῖν Rv 3:20 (TestJob 15:2). δουλεύειν Gal 4:25. ἐμπαίζειν Mt 27:41. ἐσθίειν 9:11; 24:49; Mk 2:16ab; 14:14, 18; Lk 5:30 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 9 [Stone p. 10]). ἠρώτα … ἵνα φάγῃ μ. αὐτοῦ he asked (him) to eat with him 7:36 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 21 [Stone p. 68]; JosAs 7:1). εὐφραίνεσθαι 15:29; Ro 15:10 (Dt 32:43). κλαίειν 12:15b. κληρονομεῖν Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10; Just., D. 26, 1; cp. συγκληρονομεῖν JosAs 24:9). πίνειν Mt 26:29. ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα celebrate the Passover (with someone) 26:18. συνάγειν 12:30b; Lk 11:23b. συνεσθίειν Gal 2:12. ταράττεσθαι Mt 2:3. τρώγειν J 13:1 v.l. χαίρειν Ro 12:15a.
    ⓒ The associative aspect can also derive expression from the fact that two opposite parties exert influence upon one another or that one party brings the other to adopt a corresponding, and therefore common, attitude
    α. in friendly, or at least not in hostile, fashion: εἰρηνεύειν (3 Km 22:45) Ro 12:18; cp. 2 Ti 2:22; Hb 12:14. εὐθηνίαν ἔχειν Hm 2:3. κοινωνίαν ἔχειν 1J 1:3a, 7. λαλεῖν μετά τινος (cp. Gen 31:24, 29; 1 Macc 7:15) Mk 6:50; J 4:27ab. συλλαλεῖν μ. τινος Mt 17:3; Ac 25:12. συμβούλιον διδόναι Mk 3:6. συνάγεσθαι Mt 28:12; J 18:2. συνᾶραι λόγον Mt 18:23; 25:19. ἐγένοντο φίλοι ὅ τε. Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πιλᾶτος μετʼ ἀλλήλων Lk 23:12. οἱ μοιχεύοντες μετʼ αὐτῆς those who commit adultery with her Rv 2:22. πορνεύειν (cp. Ezk 16:34; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 7 [Stone p. 24]) 17:2; 18:3, 9. μολύνεσθαι 14:4 (cp. En 12:4 τῶν γυναικῶν ἐμιάνθησαν).
    β. in hostile fashion; after verbs of fighting, quarreling, etc. to denote the pers. w. whom the strife is being carried on πολεμεῖν μ. τινος carry on war with = against someone (נִלְחַם עִם פּ׳ 1 Km 17:33; 3 Km 12:24; ParJer 7:10. But s. also OGI 201, 3 ἐπολέμησα μετὰ τῶν Βλεμύων; BGU 1035, 9; 11. Also in Mod. Gk. [AThumb, Hdb. der neugriech. Volkssprache2 1910 §162, 1 note]) Rv 2:16; 12:7; 13:4; 17:14 (B-D-F §193, 4; Rob. 610). Also πόλεμον ποιεῖν (Gen 14:2; 1 Ch 5:19) 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:21 Theod.); 19:19. ζητεῖν μ. τινος deliberate or dispute w. someone J 16:19; cp. 3:25 (cp. ApcEsdr 2:6 δικάζου μεθʼ ἡμῶν). κρίνεσθαι go to law w. someone 1 Cor 6:6. κρίματα ἔχειν μ. τινος have lawsuits w. someone vs. 7.
    ⓓ of any other relation betw. persons, whether already existing or brought about in some manner εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μ. Μαρίας Mt 2:11. ἀνταποδοῦναι ὑμῖν ἄνεσιν μ. ἡμῶν 2 Th 1:7. ἐκδέχομαι αὐτὸν μ. τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Cor 16:11. Of delegations, composed of several units Mt 22:16; 2 Cor 8:18. συμφωνεῖν Mt 20:2.
    ⓔ of things ὧν τὸ αἷμα ἔμιξεν μ. τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν Lk 13:1. Pass. πιεῖν οἶνον μ. χολῆς μεμιγμένον Mt 27:34.
    ⓕ to show a close connection betw. two nouns, upon the first of which the main emphasis lies (Thu. 7, 75, 3 λύπη μ. φόβου; Pla., Rep. 9, 591b ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν; Ar. 11:2 τόξον ἔχειν μ. φαρέτρας) ἀγάπη μ. πίστεως Eph 6:23. πίστις μ. σωφροσύνης 1 Ti 2:15. εὐσέβεια μ. αὐταρκείας 6:6. Cp. Eph 4:2b; Col 1:11; 1 Ti 1:14. φάρμακον μ. οἰνομέλιτος ITr 6:2.
    ③ marker of attendant circumstances of someth. that takes place, with
    ⓐ of moods, emotions, wishes, feelings, excitement, states of mind or body (Xenophon Eph. 1, 15, 5 μ. ἀδείας; 2, 10, 4 μ. ἐπιμελείας; PAmh II, 133, 11 μετὰ πολλῶν κόπων; PLond II, 358, 8 p. 172 [II A.D.]; SIG index IV p. 445f; LXX [Johannessohn, Präp. 209ff]; En et al.) μ. αἰδοῦς with modesty 1 Ti 2:9. μ. αἰσχύνης with shame (s. αἰσχύνη 2) Lk 14:9. μ. εὐνοίας Eph 6:7. μ. εὐχαριστίας Phil 4:6; 1 Ti 4:3f; cp. Ac 24:3. μετὰ χαρᾶς (2 Macc 15:28; 3 Macc 5:21; 6:34; En 10:16; PsSol 8:16 al.; s. χαρά 1a) 1 Th 1:6; Hb 10:34; 13:17; cp. Phil 2:29. μ. φόβου καὶ τρόμου 2 Cor 7:15; Eph 6:5; Phil 2:12. μ. φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς Mt 28:8. μ. πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 Pt 3:16. μ. παρρησίας (Lev 26:13; 1 Macc 4:18; s. παρρησία 3a) Ac 2:29; 4:29, 31; 28:31; Hb 4:16. μ. πεποιθήσεως 1 Cl 31:3. μ. σπουδῆς (3 Macc 5:24, 27; Mel., P. 12, 80) Mk 6:25; Lk 1:39. μ. ταπεινοφροσύνης Eph 4:2a; cp. Ac 20:19. μ. ὀργῆς (3 Macc 6:23; TestJob 4:4) Mk 3:5. μ. δακρύων in tears (3 Macc 1:16; 4:2; 5:7; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 19 [Stone p. 20]; 14 p. 94, 21 [St. p. 36]; JosAs 28:8; ApcEsdr 6:23; s. δάκρυον) Mk 9:24 v.l.; Hb 5:7; 12:17. μ. εἰρήνης (s. εἰρήνη 1b) Ac 15:33; Hb 11:31.
    ⓑ of other accompanying phenomena (Antig. Car. 148 μετὰ φλογὸς καίεσθαι) μ. διωγμῶν though with persecutions Mk 10:30. μ. ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν 1 Ti 4:14. μ. νηστειῶν Ac 14:23. μ. θορύβου (Jos., Ant. 5, 216) 24:18. μ. παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 8:4. μ. παρατηρήσεως Lk 17:20. μ. ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας Ac 27:10 (s. ὕβρις 3). μ. φαντασίας 25:23. μ. δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30; Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27 (Just., A I, 50, 1 al. μ. δόξης, D. 132, 1 w. δυνάμεως). μ. ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς Ac 26:12 (Jos., Ant. 20, 180 μετʼ ἐξουσίας). μ. βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά (s. βραχίων) Ac 13:17. μ. φωνῆς μεγάλης w. a loud voice Lk 17:15 (cp. EpArist 235; 281; JosAs 28:9). μ. σάλπιγγος with a trumpet call Mt 24:31 (Plut., Mor. 1135f μετʼ αὐλῶν=with the sound of flutes). σφραγίσαντες τ. λίθον μετὰ τ. κουστωδίας makes the stationing of the guard an accompaniment to the sealing of the stone Mt 27:66 (another possibility here is the instrumental use of μετά [Lycurgus the orator 124 μ. παραδειγμάτων διδάσκειν; SEG VIII, 246, 8 μετὰ κυνῶν—an instrument of torture—βασανίσαι; CWessely, Neue griech. Zauberpap. 1893, 234 γράφε μ. μέλανος; 2 Macc 6:16]: secure the stone by means of a guard; s. σφραγίζω 1).
    ⓒ of concrete objects, which serve as equipment (Appian, Maced. 9 §4 μετὰ χρυσῶν στεφάνων; POxy 123, 15; 19 μετὰ τῶν χλαμύδων εἰσβῆναι; 1 Esdr 5:57; Jdth 15:13; TestJob 24:10 μ. ψαλίδος; JosAs 7:4 μ. χρυσίου καὶ ἀργύριου; ParJer 9:31 μ. πολλῶν λίθων; ApcSed 7:10 μ. χαλιναρίου; ApcMos 40 μ. τῶν σινδόνων) μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Mt 26:47; 55; Mk 14:43, 48; Lk 22:52. μ. φανῶν καὶ λαμπάδων καὶ ὅπλων (Xenophon Eph. p. 336, 20 μ. λαμπάδων) J 18:3.
    B. w. acc. In our lit. only in the mng. after, behind
    ① marker of position that is behind someth., behind (Hom.+; Polyb.; Just., A I, 13, 4; Tat. 2, 2; not LXX) μ. τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα behind the second curtain Hb 9:3.
    ② marker of time after another point of time, after (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX)
    ⓐ with the time expressly given μ. πολὺν χρόνον (2 Macc 6:1.—μετʼ οὐ πολὺν χρ.: Hero Alex. I p. 340, 6; SIG 1169, 54; Jos., Vi. 407) Mt 25:19. μ. τοσοῦτον χρόνον (4 Macc 5:7; ParJer 5:18) Hb 4:7. μ. χρόνον τινά (Diod S 9, 10, 2; Witkowski 26, 9 [III B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 8, 398; cp. En 106:1 μ. δὲ χρόνον; ApcSed 13:3 μ. χρόνον) Hv 1, 1, 2f; Hs 5, 2, 5; 9, 13, 8. μ. ἡμέρας ἕξ after six days Mt 17:1; Mk 9:2 (ApcMos 42 μ. τὰς ἓξ ἡμέρας). μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 5; Polyaenus 6, 53; 8, 62; EpArist 301; TestJob 52:1f; 53:7; ParJer 9:14; Jos., Ant 7, 280) Mt 27:63; Mk 8:31; 10:34; Lk 2:46; cp. μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας AcPlCor 2:30. μ. δύο ἡμέρας Mt 26:2; Mk 14:1 (cp. Caesar, Bell. Gall. 4, 9, 1 post tertiam diem=on the third day). μ. τινας ἡμέρας Ac 15:36; 24:24. μετʼ οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας (Artem. 1, 78 p. 72, 30; Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13. οὐ μ. πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας not long after these days = within a few days Ac 1:5 (B-D-F §226; 433, 3; Rob. 612; 1158; Dssm., ZVS 45, 1913, 60). W. gen. foll. μ. ἡμέρας εἴκοσι τῆς προτέρας ὁράσεως twenty days after the former vision Hv 4, 1, 1 (cp. Biogr. p. 31 μετὰ ξ´ ἔτη τοῦ Ἰλιακοῦ πολέμου; Gen 16:3). μ. τρεῖς μῆνας Ac 28:11. μ. τρία ἔτη Gal 1:18. ὁ μ. τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονὼς νόμος 3:17.
    ⓑ w. designations that are general, but include the idea of time: μ. τὴν ἄφιξίν μου Ac 20:29. μ. τὸ πάσχα after the Passover 12:4. μ. τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Mt 1:12.
    ⓒ gener. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν after the (time of) tribulation Mk 13:24; cp. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων Mt 24:29. μ. τὴν ἔγερσιν 27:53. μ. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ac 13:15. μ. τὸ βάπτισμα 10:37. μ. μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν Tit 3:10. μ. τὸ ψωμίον after he had eaten the piece of bread J 13:27.—Quite gener. μ. τοῦτο after this, afterward (Lucian, Hermot. 31; Gen 18:5; Lev 14:19; EpArist 258; TestJob 11:4; TestReub 1:9; TestLevi 6:3; Just., D. 57, 4) J 2:12; 11:7, 11; 19:28; Hb 9:27; Rv 7:1. μ. ταῦτα after this (Aeneas Tact. 240; 350; Diod S 1, 7, 1; Ex 3:20; 11:8 and oft.; TestJob 21:4; TestLevi 6:5; TestJos 19:5; JosAs 10:15; ParJer 3:10; ApcEsdr 4:36; ApcMos 2; Just., A I, 32, 6) Mk 16:12; Lk 5:27; 10:1 and oft. μ. οὐ πολύ (Dio Chrys. 56 [73], 8; Lucian, Scyth. 1; Herodian 1, 9, 7; BGU 614, 14; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 96 II, 9; 1 Esdr 3:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 132) not long afterward Ac 27:14. μ. μικρόν a short while afterward Mt 26:73; Mk 14:70 (Just., D. 56, 17). Also μ. βραχύ Lk 22:58 (cp. μετʼ ὀλίγον: Lucian, Dial, Mort. 15, 3; PRyl 77, 41; Wsd 15:8; Jdth 13:9; TestAbrA 7 p. 84, 8 [Stone p. 16]; GrBar 9:3; Jos., Ant. 12, 136; 10:15; Just., D. 56, 18).
    ⓓ w. subst. aor. inf. foll.
    α. w. acc. (SIG 633, 105; 640, 13; 695, 78; 1233, 1; Sir 46:20; Jdth 16:25; Bar 1:9; 1 Macc 1:1, 9; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 11 [Stone p. 80]; 117, 5 [St. p. 82]; TestJob 5:2; TestLevi 18:1; ApcMos 1; Just., A I, 50, 12.—B-D-F §406, 3; Rob. 979) μ. τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με after I am raised up Mt 26:32; Mk 14:28. μ. τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην after John was arrested Mk 1:14.—Ac 1:3; 7:4; 10:41; 15:13; 19:21; 20:1; Hv 2, 1, 3; m 4, 1, 7; Hs 8, 1, 3; 8, 2, 5.
    β. without acc. (Aelian, VH 12, 1 p. 118, 27; Herodian 2, 9, 5; SIG 976, 39; UPZ 110, 193 [164 B.C.]; Sir 23:20; 32:18 v.l.; 1 Macc 1:20; ApcMos 26:42f; Just., A I, 14, 1; Tat. 16, 1) μ. τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς after he had spoken to them Mk 16:19.—Lk 12:5; 1 Cor 11:25; Hb 10:26.—W. perf. inf. 10:15.—M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μετά

  • 19 estado

    m.
    1 state.
    estado de excepción o emergencia state of emergency
    estado de salud (state of) health
    estado de sitio state of siege
    estar en buen/mal estado to be in good/bad condition; (vehículo, terreno) to be fresh/off (alimento, bebida)
    en estado de alerta on (the) alert
    estar en estado (de esperanza o buena esperanza) to be expecting
    quedarse en estado to become pregnant
    estado anímico o de ánimo state of mind
    estado de bienestar welfare state
    estado civil marital status
    estado de cuentas statement of accounts
    2 state (gobierno).
    el estado the State
    3 state.
    estado policial police state
    estado satélite satellite (state)
    Estados Unidos de América United States of America
    4 status, standing.
    5 condition, shape.
    past part.
    past participle of spanish verb: estar.
    * * *
    1 (situación) state, condition
    3 HISTORIA estate
    4 PLÍTICA state
    \
    estar en buen estado to be in good condition
    estar en estado to be pregnant
    estar en estado de funcionamiento to be in working order
    estar en mal estado to be in bad condition
    estado civil marital status
    estado de ánimo state of mind
    estado de bienestar welfare state
    estado de cuentas statement of accounts
    estado de excepción state of emergency
    estado de guerra state of war
    estado de salud state of health
    estado noble noble estate
    estado sólido solid state
    * * *
    noun m.
    * * *
    SM
    1) (=situación)
    a) [de objeto, proceso] state

    ¿en qué estado se encuentran las relaciones entre los dos países? — what is the state of relations between the two countries?

    • estar en buen estado — [instalación, alimentos] to be in good condition

    • estar en mal estado — [instalación] to be in (a) poor condition, be in a bad state; [alimentos] to be off

    b) [de persona] condition

    estado de alarma, estado de alerta — state of alert

    estado de ánimo — [emocional] mood; [mental] state of mind

    estado de coma — coma, state of coma

    en este estado de cosas, lo mejor es convocar nuevas elecciones — given the state of affairs, the best thing to do is call another election

    ¿cuál es el estado de cosas ahora? — what's the state of play now?

    estado de emergencia, estado de excepción — state of emergency

    estado de gracia — [de creyente] state of grace; [de político, gobierno] honeymoon period; [de deportista] run of good form

    estado de la red — (Inform) volume of users

    estado de salud — condition, state of health

    2) (Fís) state
    3)

    • en estado (=embarazada) —

    • estar en estado de buena esperanza — to be expecting

    • en avanzado estado de gestación — heavily pregnant, in an advanced state of pregnancy

    • estar en estado interesante — hum to be expecting, be in the family way *

    4) (=nación) state

    los intereses del estado — national o state interests

    asuntos de estado — affairs of state, state affairs

    • hombre de estado — statesman

    estado asistencial, estado benefactor — welfare state

    estado del bienestar, estado de previsión — welfare state

    golpe 10)
    5) (=región) [en EE.UU., México, Brasil] state
    6) ( Hist) (=clase) estate

    • el estado eclesiástico — the clergy

    • estado llano, tercer estado — third estate, commoners pl

    7) (Mil)
    8) (Com, Econ) (=informe) report

    estado de contabilidad — Méx balance sheet

    estado de cuenta — bank statement, statement of account frm

    estado de cuentas — [de una empresa] statement of account

    * * *
    1)
    a) (situación, condición) state

    en avanzado estado de descomposición — (frml) in an advanced state of decomposition

    en estado de embriaguez — (frml) under the influence of alcohol

    tomar estado público — (RPl frml) to become public (knowledge)

    b) (Med) condition

    en avanzado estado de gestación — (frml) in an advanced state of pregnancy (frml)

    estar en estado — (euf) to be expecting (colloq)

    quedarse en estado — (euf) to get pregnant

    2) (nación, gobierno) state

    la seguridad del Estado — national o state security

    •
    * * *
    1)
    a) (situación, condición) state

    en avanzado estado de descomposición — (frml) in an advanced state of decomposition

    en estado de embriaguez — (frml) under the influence of alcohol

    tomar estado público — (RPl frml) to become public (knowledge)

    b) (Med) condition

    en avanzado estado de gestación — (frml) in an advanced state of pregnancy (frml)

    estar en estado — (euf) to be expecting (colloq)

    quedarse en estado — (euf) to get pregnant

    2) (nación, gobierno) state

    la seguridad del Estado — national o state security

    •
    * * *
    estado1
    1 = state, commonwealth.

    Ex: WLN (Western Library Network) is composed of libraries in the states of Washington and Alaska in the United states, and is expanding to cover other states and libraries in Canada.

    Ex: The article is entitled 'Academic libraries: `towards commonwealth and coalitions'.
    * abogado del estado, abogado de la corona = Queen's Counsel (QC).
    * al norte del estado = upstate.
    * capital del estado = nation-state capital, state capital.
    * Capitolio del Estado = State Capitol.
    * condición de estado = statehood.
    * controlado por el estado = state-controlled.
    * Denominación de Productos para las Estadísticas del Comercio Externo de la C = Nomenclature of Goods for the External Trade Statistics of the Community and Statistics of Trade between Member States (NIMEXE).
    * de varios estados = multi-state [multistate].
    * empleado del estado = state employee.
    * en el norte del estado = upstate.
    * en todo el estado = statewide [state-wide].
    * estado árabe = Arab state.
    * estado de derecho = rule of law.
    * estado de hecho = rule of men.
    * estado del bienestar = welfare state.
    * estado isleño = island nation.
    * estado laico = secular state.
    * estado miembro = member government, member state.
    * estado nacional = nation state, national state.
    * estado niñera = nanny state.
    * estado paternalista = nanny state.
    * estados bálticos, los = Baltic States, the.
    * estado soberano = sovereign state.
    * Estados Unidos continental = continental United States, the.
    * Estados Unidos de América, los (EE.UU., los) = USA, the (United States of America, the).
    * Estados Unidos, los = US, US, the [U.S.], United States, the.
    * financiado por el estado = state-supported, state-funded.
    * golpe de estado = coup d'etat, putsch.
    * Guerra entre España y los Estados Unidos, la = Spanish-American War, the.
    * hombre de estado = statesman [statesmen, -pl.].
    * intento de golpe de estado = attempted coup, coup attempt.
    * jefe de estado = head of state, chief of state.
    * jefe del estado mayor = Chief of Staff.
    * localizado en los Estados Unidos = US-based.
    * nación sin estado = stateless nation.
    * objeto de delito contra el estado = impeachable.
    * papá estado = nanny state.
    * poder del estado = state power.
    * propiedad del estado = state property.
    * región central de los Estados Unidos, la = American midwest, the.
    * regulado por el estado = state-regulated.
    * secretario de Estado = Secretary of State.
    * Secretario de Estado, el = State Secretary, the.
    * secreto de estado = state secret.
    * supervisado por el estado = state-regulated.
    * tentativa de golpe de estado = attempted coup, coup attempt.
    * visita de estado = state visit.
    * zona de los tres estados = tristate area.

    estado2
    2 = stage, state, status, condition.

    Ex: The first stage in the choice of access points must be the definition of an author.

    Ex: Before she could respond and follow up with a question about her distraught state, Feng escaped to the women's room.
    Ex: AACR2 assigns this main entry status to the person who is chiefly responsible for the creation of the intellectual or artistic content of a work.
    Ex: He was laid upon the bed and upon examination his head was found in a terrible condition, swelled and bruised from the effect of sandbag blows.
    * alternar de un estado a otro = toggle.
    * base de datos en estado original = raw database.
    * buen estado físico = fitness, physical fitness.
    * datos en estado bruto = raw facts.
    * dejar a Alguien en estado = knock + Alguien + up.
    * el estado de las cosas = the lay of the land [the lie of the land, -UK].
    * en buen estado = in good condition, in good working condition, in good shape, in good nick.
    * en buen estado de funcionamiento = in good working condition.
    * en estado = pregnant, in the family way.
    * en estado de abandono = decaying, dilapidated.
    * en estado de alerta = on standby, on alert.
    * en estado de buena esperanza = pregnant, in the family way.
    * en estado de cambio = in a state of flux.
    * en estado de descomposición = decaying.
    * en estado de deterioro = decaying, dilapidated.
    * en estado de reserva = on standby.
    * en estado de sitio = in a state of siege, under siege.
    * en estado embrionario = embryo, embryonic, in embryonic stage, in embryo, in the embryo stage.
    * en excelente estado = in tip-top condition, in tip-top form.
    * en mal estado = in bad condition, in poor condition, in bad shape, in poor shape, in bad nick.
    * en perfecto estado = intact, in mint condition, in immaculate condition.
    * en su estado embrionario = in its embryonic stage.
    * en su estado natural = in the wild.
    * en tado de deterioro = dilapidated.
    * en un estado embrionario = in an embryonic stage.
    * estado actual = current state, present state.
    * estado anímico = state, mood.
    * estado civil = marital status.
    * estado de abandono = state of neglect.
    * estado de alerta = state of alert.
    * estado de amenaza terrorista = terror alert.
    * estado de ánimo = mood, state of mind, frame of mind, humour [humor, -USA].
    * estado de cambio = state of flux.
    * estado de confusión = state of confusion.
    * estado de emergencia = state of emergency.
    * estado de excepción = state of emergency, state of exception.
    * estado de inactividad = state of dormancy.
    * estado de la circulación = traffic conditions.
    * estado de la cuestión = state of the art.
    * estado del arte = state of the art.
    * estado de las artes = state of the arts.
    * estado de las carreteras = traffic report, road conditions.
    * estado del ordenador en fuera de línea = offlineness.
    * estado del ordenador en línea = onlineness.
    * estado del tiempo = weather conditions.
    * estado de salud = state of health.
    * estado de trance = state of trance.
    * estado de una situación = state of being.
    * estado de vigilia = wakefulness.
    * estado físico = physical condition, physical shape, physical state.
    * estado híbrido = hybridity.
    * estado incompleto = incompleteness.
    * estado latente = latency, state of dormancy.
    * estado líquido = molten state.
    * estado molecular = molecular state.
    * estado natural = natural state.
    * estado sólido = solid state.
    * estado vegetativo = vegetative state.
    * estado vegetativo persistente = persistent vegetative state.
    * estar en estado = be up the spout, have + a bun in the oven.
    * estar en estado de buena esperanza = be up the spout, have + a bun in the oven.
    * estar en estado de cambio = be in flux.
    * estudio crítico del estado de la cuestión = review.
    * estudio del estado de la cuestión = survey.
    * física del estado sólido = solid state physics.
    * información en su estado primario = raw information.
    * informe del estado de la cuestión = state of the art report, state of the art review.
    * informe sobre el estado de la nación = state of the nation report.
    * informe sobre el estado general de las carreteras = road report.
    * mal estado = disrepair, state of disrepair.
    * mal estado de salud = poor health.
    * mantenerse en buen estado físico = keep + fit.
    * mujer en estado = pregnant woman.
    * perfecto estado = intactness.
    * poner en estado de alerta = put on + standby, put on + alert, place + Nombre + on standby.
    * que conserva su estado natural = unspoilt [unspoiled, -USA].
    * quedarse en estado = become + pregnant, be up the spout.
    * sin información sobre el estado anterior = stateless.
    * volver Algo a su estado anterior = put + Nombre + back on track.

    * * *
    A
    1 (situación, condición) state
    el debate sobre el estado de la nación the debate on the state of the nation
    la casa está en buen estado the house is in good condition
    las carreteras están en muy mal estado the roads are in very poor condition o in a very bad state
    la carne estaba en mal estado the meat was bad o ( BrE) off
    en avanzado estado de descomposición ( frml); in an advanced state of decomposition
    en estado de embriaguez ( frml); under the influence of alcohol
    tomar estado público ( RPl frml); to become public (knowledge)
    2 ( Med) condition
    su estado general es satisfactorio ( frml); his general condition is satisfactory
    en avanzado estado de gestación ( frml); in an advanced state of pregnancy ( frml), seven ( o eight etc) months pregnant
    no debería fumar en su estado she shouldn't smoke in her condition
    estar en estado ( euf); to be expecting ( colloq)
    estar en estado de buena esperanza ( hum); to be expecting a happy event ( euph)
    estar en estado interesante ( hum); to be expecting ( colloq)
    quedarse en estado ( euf); to get pregnant
    Compuestos:
    marital status
    state of alert
    state of mind
    coma
    estaba en estado de coma she was in a coma
    bank statement, statement of account
    ● estado de emergencia or excepción
    state of emergency
    state of grace
    state of war
    weather conditions
    state of maximum alert
    state of maximum security
    state of siege
    financial statement
    solid state
    B
    1 (nación) state
    la seguridad del Estado national o state security
    2 (gobierno) state
    un asunto de estado a state matter
    el Estado the State
    3 ( Hist) (estamento) estate
    el primer/segundo/tercer estado the first/second/third estate
    Compuestos:
    welfare state
    city-state
    welfare state
    el estado llano the commonalty, the commons (pl)
    ( Mil) general staff
    police state
    sovereign state
    buffer state
    ( Pol); rogue state
    * * *

     

    Del verbo estar: ( conjugate estar)

    estado es:

    el participio

    Multiple Entries:
    estado    
    estar
    estado sustantivo masculino
    1


    estado de cuenta bank statement;
    estado de emergencia or excepción state of emergency;
    la casa está en buen estado the house is in good condition
    b) (Med) condition;

    ◊ estar en estado (euf) to be expecting (colloq);

    quedarse en estado (euf) to get pregnant
    c)


    2 (nación, gobierno) state;
    ◊ la seguridad del Eestado national o state security;

    estado de bienestar welfare state
    estar 1 ( conjugate estar) cópula
    1

    ◊ Estar denotes a changed condition or state as opposed to identity or nature, which is normally expressed by ser. Estar is also used when the emphasis is on the speaker's perception of things, of their appearance, taste, etc. The examples given below should be contrasted with those to be found in ser 1 cópula 1 to be;

    estás más gordo you've put on weight;
    estoy cansada I'm tired;
    está muy simpático conmigo he's being o he's been so nice to me (recently);
    ¡todo está tan caro! things are o have become so expensive!
    b) ( con

    ◊ bien, mal, mejor, peor): están todos bien, gracias they're all fine, thanks;

    ¡qué bien estás en esta foto! you look great in this photo!;
    está mal que no se lo perdones it's wrong of you not to forgive him;
    ver tb bien, mal, mejor, peor
    2 ( hablando de estado civil) to be;

    3 ( seguido de participios)

    estaban abrazados they had their arms around each other;
    ver tb v aux 2
    4 ( seguido de preposición) to be;
    (para más ejemplos ver tb la preposición o el nombre correspondiente);

    ¿a cómo está la uva? how much are the grapes?;
    está con el sarampión she has (the) measles;
    estoy de cocinera I'm doing the cooking;
    estamos sin electricidad the electricity is off at the moment;
    está sin pintar it hasn't been painted yet
    verbo intransitivo
    1 ( en un lugar) to be;
    ◊ ¿dónde está Chiapas? where's Chiapas?;

    está a 20 kilómetros de aquí it's 20 kilometers from here;
    ¿sabes dónde está Pedro? do you know where Pedro is?;
    ¿está Rodrigo? is Rodrigo in?;
    solo estadoé unos días I'll only be staying a few days;
    ¿cuánto tiempo estadoás en Londres? how long are you going to be in London (for)?
    2 ( en el tiempo):
    ◊ ¿a qué (día) estamos? what day is it today?;

    ¿a cuánto estamos hoy? what's the date today?;
    estamos a 28 de mayo it's May 28th (AmE) o (BrE) the 28th of May;
    estamos en primavera it's spring
    3
    a) (tener como función, cometido):


    estamos para ayudarlos we're here to help them


    4 (estar listo, terminado):

    lo atas con un nudo y ya está you tie a knot in it and that's it o there you are;
    enseguida estoy I'll be right with you
    5 (Esp) ( quedar) (+ me/te/le etc) (+ compl):

    la 46 te está mejor the 46 fits you better
    estado v aux
    1 ( con gerundio):

    estoy viendo que va a ser imposible I'm beginning to see that it's going to be impossible
    2 ( con participio):

    ya está hecho un hombrecito he's a proper young man now;
    ver tb estar cópula 3
    estarse verbo pronominal ( enf) ( permanecer) to stay;
    ◊ ¿no te puedes estado quieto? can't you stay o keep still?;

    estese tranquilo don't worry
    estar 2 sustantivo masculino (esp AmL) living room
    estado sustantivo masculino
    1 Pol state
    estado de bienestar, welfare state
    2 (circunstancia, situación) state, condition: este abrigo está en un estado lamentable, this coat is in a terrible state
    no puedes conducir en ese estado, you can't drive in that condition
    estado de ánimo/ excepción/guerra/sitio, state of mind/emergency/ war/siege
    estado civil, marital status
    Mil Estado Mayor, staff
    ♦ Locuciones: estar en estado (de buena esperanza), to be expecting
    abogado del Estado, legal representative of the State
    razón de Estado, reason of State
    estar verbo intransitivo
    1 (existir, hallarse) to be: está al norte, it is to the north
    ¿estarás en casa?, will you be at home?
    no está en ningún lado, it isn't anywhere
    estamos aquí para servirle, we are at your service
    su pedido aún no está, your order isn't ready yet
    2 (permanecer) to stay: estos días estoy en casa de mis padres, these days I'm staying at my parents' place
    estoy en la oficina de ocho a dos, I'm at the office from eight to two
    quiero que estés aquí un minuto, ahora vuelvo, stay here, I'll be right back
    3 (tener una situación actual determinada: con adjetivo o participio) estaba blanco como la cera, he had turned as white as a sheet
    está dormido, he's asleep
    está teñida de rubio, her hair's dyed blonde
    (con gerundio) está estudiando, he is studying
    estaba preparando la comida, I was cooking
    (con adverbio) estoy tan lejos, I'm so far away
    está muy mal, (enfermo) he is very ill
    4 (quedar, sentar) el jersey me está pequeño, the sweater is too small for me
    5 (para indicar precio, grados, fecha) (+ a: fecha) to be: ¿a qué día estamos?, what's the date?
    estamos a 1 de Julio, it is the first of July
    (: precio) to be at: ¿a cómo/cuánto están las manzanas?, how much are the apples?
    están a setenta pesetas el kilo, they're seventy pesetas a kilo
    (: grados) en Madrid estamos a cuarenta grados, it's forty degrees in Madrid
    ♦ Locuciones: ¿estamos?, agreed?
    estar a disposición de, to be at the disposal of
    estar a la que salta, to be ready to take advantage of an opportunity
    estar a las duras y a las maduras, to take the bad with the good
    estar al caer, to be just round the corner
    estar en baja, to be waning
    estar en todo, to be on top of everything
    estaría bueno, whatever next
    ESTAR CON: (de acuerdo con) estoy con María, I agree with Mary
    ESTAR DE: estoy de broma, I'm joking
    está de camarero, he's working as a waiter
    estaba de Dios que las cosas sucedieran así, it was God's will that things turned out this way, está de vacaciones, he's on holiday
    me voy a marchar porque está claro que aquí estoy de más, I'm going to go because it's obvious that I'm in the way
    ESTAR ENCIMA: su madre siempre está encima de él, his mother is always on top of him
    ESTAR PARA: no estamos para bromas, we are in no mood for jokes
    esa ropa está para planchar, these clothes are ready to be ironed
    cuando estaba para salir, me llamaron, when I was just about to leave, they called me
    ESTAR POR: la casa está por construir, the house has still to be built
    estuve por decirle lo que pensaba, I was tempted to tell him what I thought
    estoy por la igualdad de derechos, I'm for equal rights
    ESTAR QUE: está que no puede con su alma, he is exhausted
    familiar está que trina, he's hopping mad
    ESTAR TRAS: está tras el ascenso, he is after promotion
    estoy tras una blusa blanca, I'm looking for a white blouse
    El uso del verbo to stay como traducción de estar en un lugar es incorrecto, a menos que quieras expresar lo contrario de irse o marcharse (no me voy a la playa, estaré en casa todo el verano, I'm not going to the beach, I'm staying at home all summer) o te refieras a alojarse: Estoy en el Palace. I'm staying at the Palace.

    ' estado' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abogada
    - abogado
    - aconfesional
    - amiguete
    - animada
    - animado
    - anímica
    - anímico
    - ánimo
    - aparato
    - atonía
    - bajón
    - barra
    - bienestar
    - BOE
    - boletín
    - bonanza
    - bono
    - bregar
    - con
    - condición
    - coño
    - dejar
    - deplorable
    - desocupación
    - deterioro
    - día
    - dormitar
    - estribar
    - fiscal
    - fragmentaria
    - fragmentario
    - ir
    - golpe
    - gravedad
    - hombre
    - jefa
    - jefatura
    - jefe
    - lamentable
    - licitar
    - mentar
    - mira
    - notar
    - penosa
    - penoso
    - permanecer
    - permanencia
    - primitiva
    - primitivo
    English:
    abject
    - absent
    - act up
    - agitation
    - almost
    - Attorney General
    - bad
    - bad-tempered
    - be
    - blissful
    - budget
    - canvass
    - chancellor
    - check up on
    - club
    - combine
    - comfortable
    - condition
    - conscious
    - consciousness
    - coup
    - crown
    - decaying
    - deliberate
    - delusion
    - denunciation
    - disease
    - disheveled
    - dishevelled
    - disrepair
    - doldrums
    - ever
    - evident
    - fall
    - fitness
    - fixture
    - frame of mind
    - gilt-edged
    - he's
    - head
    - herself
    - himself
    - incompleteness
    - intermittent
    - intoxicated
    - limbo
    - maintain
    - marital status
    - marriage
    - mind
    * * *
    estado nm
    1. [situación, condición] state;
    su estado es grave his condition is serious;
    me lo encontré en un estado penoso I found him in a pitiful state;
    estar en buen/mal estado [vehículo, terreno, edificio] to be in good/bad condition;
    [alimento, bebida] to be fresh/Br off o US spoiled;
    la moqueta se halla en muy mal estado the carpet is in very bad condition;
    en estado de alerta on (the) alert;
    estar en estado (de buena esperanza) to be expecting, to be in the family way;
    quedarse en estado to become pregnant;
    estar en estado de merecer to be marriageable
    estado de ánimo state of mind, mood;
    estado de bienestar welfare state;
    estado civil marital status;
    estado de coma: [m5] en estado de coma in a coma;
    estado de cuentas statement of accounts;
    estado de emergencia state of emergency;
    estado de equilibrio state of equilibrium;
    estado estacionario [de enfermo] stable condition;
    estado de excepción state of emergency;
    estado de gracia [de santo] state of grace;
    estar en estado de gracia [deportista] to be on excellent form;
    estado de reposo: [m5] en estado de reposo at rest;
    estado de salud (state of) health;
    estado de sitio state of siege;
    estado vegetativo vegetative state;
    estado vegetativo permanente persistent vegetative state
    2. Fís state;
    un cuerpo en estado sólido/líquido/gaseoso a body in a solid/liquid/gaseous state
    estado cristalino crystalline state
    3. [gobierno] state;
    temas de estado affairs of state;
    un hombre de estado a statesman;
    el Estado [el gobierno, la administración] the State;
    asuntos que atañen a la seguridad del Estado matters relating to state security;
    el Estado de las Autonomías = the organization of the Spanish state into autonomous regions with varying degrees of devolved power
    4. [país, división territorial] state;
    un estado independiente an independent state;
    un estado de derecho a state which is subject to the rule of law
    estado policial police state;
    Estados Unidos (de América) United States (of America);
    Estados Unidos Mexicanos United Mexican States
    5. Mil Estado Mayor general staff
    6. Hist [estamento] estate
    Hist los Estados Generales the Estates General;
    el estado llano the third estate, the common people
    * * *
    m
    1 state
    2 MED condition;
    en buen/mal estado in good/bad condition
    3
    :
    el Estado the State
    * * *
    estado nm
    1) : state
    2) : status
    estado civil: marital status
    3) condición: condition
    * * *
    1. (en general) state
    2. (condición) condition

    Spanish-English dictionary > estado

  • 20 state

    I steit noun
    1) (the condition in which a thing or person is: the bad state of the roads; The room was in an untidy state; He inquired about her state of health; What a state you're in!; He was not in a fit state to take the class.)
    2) (a country considered as a political community, or, as in the United States, one division of a federation: The Prime Minister visits the Queen once a week to discuss affairs of state; The care of the sick and elderly is considered partly the responsibility of the state; (also adjective) The railways are under state control; state-controlled / owned industries.)
    3) (ceremonial dignity and splendour: The Queen, wearing her robes of state, drove in a horse-drawn coach to Westminster; (also adjective) state occasions/banquets.)
    •
    - stateliness
    - statesman
    - statesmanlike
    - statesmanship
    - get into a state
    - lie in state
    II steit verb
    (to say or announce clearly, carefully and definitely: You have not yet stated your intentions.)
    state1 n
    1. estado / condición
    2. estado
    how many states are there in the USA? ¿cuántos estados tiene Estados Unidos?
    state2 vb declarar / afirmar
    tr[steɪt]
    1 (condition) estado
    ■ it's in a bad/good state of repair está en mal/buen estado
    ■ look at the state of this room! ¡mira cómo está la habitación!
    2 SMALLPOLITICS/SMALL (government) estado
    ■ affairs/matters of state asuntos del estado
    3 (country, division of country) estado
    4 (ceremony, pomp) ceremonia, pompa, solemnidad nombre femenino
    1 SMALLPOLITICS/SMALL estatal, del estado
    1 (say, declare, express) exponer, declarar, afirmar
    2 (specify) fijar
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    to be in a state about something estar nervioso,-a por algo
    to be in no fit state to do something no estar en condiciones de hacer algo
    to get (oneself) into a state about something ponerse nervioso,-a por algo
    to lie in state estar de cuerpo presente
    to state the obvious estar de más decir(lo)
    state benefit subsidio del estado
    state capitalism capitalismo del estado
    State Department SMALLAMERICAN ENGLISH/SMALL Ministerio de Asuntos Exteriores
    state education enseñanza pública
    state institution institución nombre femenino estatal
    state occasion ocasión nombre femenino de estado
    state of emergency estado de emergencia
    state of mind estado de ánimo
    state school escuela estatal, escuela pública
    state secret secreto de estado
    state visit visita de estado
    the state opening of Parliament la apertura del Parlamento
    the States los Estados nombre masculino plural Unidos
    state ['steɪt] vt, stated ; stating
    1) report: puntualizar, exponer (los hechos, etc.)
    state your name: diga su nombre
    2) establish, fix: establecer, fijar
    1) condition: estado m, condición f
    a liquid state: un estado líquido
    state of mind: estado de ánimo
    in a bad state: en malas condiciones
    2) nation: estado m, nación f
    3) : estado m (dentro de un país)
    the States: los Estados Unidos
    adj.
    • del estado adj.
    • estatal adj.
    • público, -a adj.
    n.
    • condición s.f.
    • estación s.f.
    • estado s.m.
    • fausto s.m.
    • paraje s.m.
    • pompa s.f.
    • tenor s.m.
    v.
    • afirmar v.
    • declarar (Jurisprudencia) v.
    • expresar v.
    • plantear v.
    • representar v.

    I steɪt
    1) noun
    2)
    a) c ( nation) estado m; (before n)

    state visit — visita f oficial, visita f de estado

    b) c ( division of country) estado m

    <the Staxes, police> — ( in US) del estado, estatal

    3) u c ( Govt) estado m

    affairs of state — asuntos mpl de estado

    Church and State — la Iglesia y el Estado; (before n) (esp BrE) <control, funding> estatal

    state education — enseñanza f pública

    state pension — pensión f del estado

    state school — escuela f pública or estatal or del estado

    4) u ( pomp)

    to lie in state — yacer* en capilla ardiente; (before n)

    state occasion — ocasión f solemne

    5) c
    a) ( condition) estado m

    state of war/emergency — estado de guerra/emergencia

    State of the Union message — ( in US) mensaje m or informe m presidencial sobre el estado de la Nación

    state of health — (estado m de) salud f

    b) ( poor condition) (colloq)
    c) ( anxious condition) (colloq)

    to be in/get (oneself) into a state about something — estar*/ponerse* nervioso por algo


    II
    transitive verb \<\<person\>\> \<\<facts/case\>\> exponer*; \<\<problem\>\> plantear, exponer*; \<\<name/address\>\> ( in writing) escribir*, consignar (frml); ( orally) decir*; \<\<law/document\>\> establecer*, estipular

    to state one's views — dar* su (or mi etc) opinión, exponer* su (or mi etc) punto de vista

    he clearly stated that... — dijo or manifestó claramente que...

    [steɪt]
    1. N
    1) (=condition) estado m

    • if this state of affairs continues — si las cosas siguen así

    it is a sorry state of affairs when... — es una situación lamentable cuando...

    • state of alert — estado m de alerta

    • state of grace — estado m de gracia

    • state of health — (estado m de) salud f

    • to be in a bad or poor state — estar en mal estado

    • state of mind — estado m de ánimo

    • the state of the nation — el estado de la nación

    • state of play — (Sport) situación f del juego

    what's the state of play? — (fig) ¿cuál es la situación?

    • state of repair — estado m

    • state of siege — estado m de sitio

    • state of war — estado m de guerra

    • state of weightlessness — estado m de ingravidez

    2) * (=poor condition)

    • you should have seen the state the car was in — tenías que haber visto cómo estaba el coche

    • just look at the state of this room! — ¡mira cómo está esta habitación!

    • the flat was in a right state after the party — el piso estaba hecho un asco después de la fiesta *

    3) * (=agitated condition)

    • to be in a state — estar nervioso

    • to get into a state — ponerse nervioso

    4) (=region, country) estado m

    • the States * — (=USA) los Estados Unidos

    • a state within a state — un estado dentro de un estado

    5) (=government)

    Secretary of State — (US) Secretario(-a) m / f de Asuntos Exteriores

    Secretary of State for Education — (Brit) Secretario(-a) m / f de Educación

    6) (=rank) rango m ; (=office) cargo m
    7) (=pomp)

    • to dine in state — cenar con mucha ceremonia

    • to lie in state — estar de cuerpo presente

    • to live in state — vivir lujosamente

    • robes of state — ropas fpl de investidura

    2. VT
    1) frm (=say, show)

    state your address and telephone number — (on form) escriba su dirección y número de teléfono; (orally) diga su dirección y número de teléfono

    to state that... — [rules, law] estipular que...

    it is nowhere stated that... — no se dice en ninguna parte que...

    it must be stated in the records that... — tiene que hacerse constar en los archivos que...

    2) (=declare, affirm) declarar

    he has publicly stated that... — ha declarado públicamente que...

    3) (=expound on, set out) [+ views] dar, expresar; [+ facts, case, problem] exponer

    he was asked to state his views on the subject — se le pidió que diera or expresara su opinión sobre el asunto

    3.
    CPD (Pol) [policy, documents, security] del Estado; [capitalism, socialism, visit, funeral, business] de estado

    state aid N — ayuda f estatal

    state apartments NPL — apartamentos destinados a visitas de mandatarios

    state bank (US) N — banco m estatal or del Estado

    state banquet N — banquete m de gala

    state benefit N — subsidios mpl del Estado, subsidios mpl estatales

    those receiving or on state benefit — aquellos que cobran subsidios del Estado or estatales

    State Capitol N — (US) edificio donde tiene su sede el poder legislativo de un estado

    state control N — control m público or estatal

    to be/come under state control — pasar a manos del Estado

    State Department N — (US) Ministerio m de Asuntos Exteriores

    state education N — enseñanza f pública

    State Enrolled Nurse N — (Brit) (formerly) enfermero(-a) m / f diplomado(-a) (con dos años de estudios)

    state fair N — (US) feria f estatal

    state funding N — financiación f pública

    state highway N — (US) carretera f nacional

    state legislature N — (US) poder m legislativo del estado

    state line N — (US) frontera f de estado

    state militia N — (US) [of specific state] milicia f del estado

    state of emergency N — estado m de emergencia

    State of the Union Address N — (US) discurso m sobre el estado de la nación

    See:
    see cultural note STATE OF THE UNION ADDRESS in state

    they believe in state ownership of the means of production — creen que los medios de producción deberían estar en manos del Estado, son partidarios de que los medios de producción estén en manos del Estado

    state pension N — pensión f del Estado, pensión f estatal

    state police N — [of country] policía f nacional; (US) [of specific state] policía f del estado

    state prison N — (US) cárcel f estatal, prisión f estatal

    State Registered Nurse N — (Brit) (formerly) enfermero(-a) m / f diplomado(-a) (con tres años de estudios)

    State Representative N — (US) (Pol) representante mf del estado

    State's attorney N — (US) procurador(a) m / f del Estado

    state school N — (Brit) colegio m público, escuela f pública

    state secret N — (lit, fig) secreto m de estado

    state sector N — sector m estatal

    State Senator N — (US) senador(a) m / f del estado

    States' rights NPL — (US) derechos mpl de los estados

    state subsidy N — subvención f estatal

    state tax N — (US) [of specific state] impuesto m del estado

    state trooper N — (US) [of specific state] policía mf del estado

    state university N — (US) universidad f pública

    STATE OF THE UNION ADDRESS Se denomina State of the Union Address al discurso que el presidente de Estados Unidos dirige cada mes de enero al Congreso y al pueblo estadounidense, en que muestra su visión de la nación y la economía y explica sus planes para el futuro. Como el discurso recibe una amplia cobertura informativa, el mensaje del presidente va dirigido no solo a los parlamentarios sino a todo el país. Esta tradición de dirigirse al Congreso tras las vacaciones de Navidad se debe a que es un requisito de la Constitución que el presidente informe al Congreso de vez en cuando sobre the State of the Union.
    STATES' RIGHTS state En EE.UU., States' rights son los derechos de los estados (como por ejemplo la recaudación de impuestos, la aprobación de leyes o el control sobre la educación pública) frente a los del gobierno federal. En la Décima Enmienda de la Constitución se dice que los poderes que la Constitución no concede a los Estados Unidos "se reservan a cada estado particular o al pueblo" y este polémico principio sirvió para justificar la secesión de los estados sureños antes de la Guerra Civil y se convirtió en una consigna contra la integración racial en el sur durante los años 50. Debido a la actual falta de confianza en el gobierno federal, que acapara cada vez más poderes a costa de un aumento del gasto, este principio tiene cada vez más seguidores.
    * * *

    I [steɪt]
    1) noun
    2)
    a) c ( nation) estado m; (before n)

    state visit — visita f oficial, visita f de estado

    b) c ( division of country) estado m

    <the Staxes, police> — ( in US) del estado, estatal

    3) u c ( Govt) estado m

    affairs of state — asuntos mpl de estado

    Church and State — la Iglesia y el Estado; (before n) (esp BrE) <control, funding> estatal

    state education — enseñanza f pública

    state pension — pensión f del estado

    state school — escuela f pública or estatal or del estado

    4) u ( pomp)

    to lie in state — yacer* en capilla ardiente; (before n)

    state occasion — ocasión f solemne

    5) c
    a) ( condition) estado m

    state of war/emergency — estado de guerra/emergencia

    State of the Union message — ( in US) mensaje m or informe m presidencial sobre el estado de la Nación

    state of health — (estado m de) salud f

    b) ( poor condition) (colloq)
    c) ( anxious condition) (colloq)

    to be in/get (oneself) into a state about something — estar*/ponerse* nervioso por algo


    II
    transitive verb \<\<person\>\> \<\<facts/case\>\> exponer*; \<\<problem\>\> plantear, exponer*; \<\<name/address\>\> ( in writing) escribir*, consignar (frml); ( orally) decir*; \<\<law/document\>\> establecer*, estipular

    to state one's views — dar* su (or mi etc) opinión, exponer* su (or mi etc) punto de vista

    he clearly stated that... — dijo or manifestó claramente que...

    English-spanish dictionary > state

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • States of Mind (sinfonía) — States of Mind (Los estados de la mente) es el título de la segunda sinfonía para banda sinfónica del compositor y director español Teo Aparicio Barberán. Contenido 1 El compositor 2 Dedicatoria 3 Instrumentación …   Wikipedia Español

  • United States of Mind (album) — United States of Mind is Covenant s fourth full length album, released in March, 2000. Infobox Album Name = United States of Mind Type = studio Artist = Covenant Released = March 2, 2000 Recorded = Genre = Synthpop, electronic music Length =… …   Wikipedia

  • Mind Dynamics (company) — Mind Dynamics Type For profit Industry Self help, Personal development, Large Group Awareness Training Founded 1968 Founder(s) Alexander Everett Headquarters Texa …   Wikipedia

  • mind, philosophy of — Branch of philosophy that studies the nature of mind and its various manifestations, including intentionality, sensation and sense perception, feeling and emotion, traits of character and personality, the unconscious, volition, thought, memory,… …   Universalium

  • Mind Dynamics — Infobox Company company name = Mind Dynamics company company type = For profit genre = foundation = 1968 founder = Alexander Everett location city = location country = location = Texas, USA origins = key people = Alexander Everett William Penn… …   Wikipedia

  • Mind control — (also known as brainwashing, coercive persuasion, mind abuse, thought control, or thought reform) refers to a process in which a group or individual systematically uses unethically manipulative methods to persuade others to conform to the wishes… …   Wikipedia

  • Mind — • Explores the term in relation to consciousness, matter, and mechanism Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight. 2006. Mind     Mind     † …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • Mind Over Murder — Family Guy episode Peter (right) running his bar in the basement …   Wikipedia

  • Mind Garage — Top Row L R Ted Smith, Norris Lytton Bottom Jack Bond, John Vaughan Center Larry McClurg, . Background information Origin Morgantown, West Virginia …   Wikipedia

  • Mind of Mystikal — Studio album by Mystikal Released October 10, 1995 (United Stat …   Wikipedia

  • Mind (charity) — Mind Mind logo Formation 1946 Headquarters Stratford, London Region served England …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»